WO2023050917A1

WO2023050917A1 - Icon area management method, and intelligent terminal and storage medium

Info

Publication number: WO2023050917A1
Application number: PCT/CN2022/100442
Authority: WO
Inventors: 张建静
Original assignee: 深圳传音控股股份有限公司
Priority date: 2021-09-28
Filing date: 2022-06-22
Publication date: 2023-04-06

Abstract

Provided in the present application are an icon area management method, and an intelligent terminal and a storage medium. The icon area management method comprises the following steps: acquiring a first icon and a second icon; determining an area display position of a target icon area, wherein the first icon and/or the second icon is/are displayed at the area display position; moving, to a preset icon display position of a non-area display position, icons, other than the first icon and/or the second icon, among icons which are displayed at the area display position; and generating the target icon area at the area display position, and displaying or moving the first icon and the second icon in or at the target icon area. By means of the method, an area display position of a target icon area can be determined, and a first icon and/or a second icon is/are displayed at the area display position, such that a user can conveniently and quickly find the target icon area, and the first icon and the second icon which are displayed in or moved to the target icon area.

Description

图标区域的管理方法、智能终端及存储介质Icon area management method, intelligent terminal and storage medium

本申请要求于2021年9月28日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202111157669.8、申请名称为“图标区域的管理方法、智能终端及存储介质”、申请号为202111148396.0、申请名称为“界面显示方法、智能终端及存储介质”申请号为202111168207.6、申请名称为“图标的处理方法、智能终端及存储介质”、申请号为202111148400.3、申请名称为“图标的处理方法、智能终端及存储介质”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application is required to be submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office of China on September 28, 2021. The application number is 202111157669.8, and the application name is "Management method of icon area, intelligent terminal and storage medium". Method, smart terminal and storage medium" with application number 202111168207.6, application name "Icon processing method, intelligent terminal and storage medium", application number 202111148400.3, application name "icon processing method, intelligent terminal and storage medium" The priority of the Chinese patent application, the entire content of which is incorporated in this application by reference.

技术领域technical field

本申请涉及电子技术领域，具体涉及图标区域的管理方法、智能终端及存储介质。The present application relates to the field of electronic technology, in particular to a method for managing icon areas, an intelligent terminal and a storage medium.

背景技术Background technique

一些实现中，申请人发现目前的图标区域通常较为随机地显示在显示屏幕中，若用户查找某个图标区域，需遍历显示屏幕中的所有图标区域，导致图标区域的查找效率较低。基于此，如何快速地查找图标区域，成为了一个亟待解决的影响用户体验的问题。In some implementations, the applicant found that the current icon areas are usually displayed on the display screen relatively randomly. If the user searches for a certain icon area, it needs to traverse all the icon areas on the display screen, resulting in low icon area search efficiency. Based on this, how to quickly find the icon area has become an urgent problem that affects user experience.

前面的叙述在于提供一般的背景信息，并不一定构成现有技术。The foregoing description is provided to provide general background information and does not necessarily constitute prior art.

申请内容application content

针对上述技术问题，本申请提供图标区域的管理方法、智能终端及存储介质，可以确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，该区域显示位置上显示有第一图标或第二图标，便于用户对目标图标区域的快速查找，以及对显示或移动至目标图标区域的第一图标和第二图标的快速查找。In view of the above technical problems, the present application provides an icon area management method, an intelligent terminal and a storage medium, which can determine the area display position of the target icon area, where the first icon or the second icon is displayed on the area display position, which is convenient for the user to identify the target icon area. Quick search of the area, and quick search of the first icon and the second icon displayed or moved to the target icon area.

为解决上述技术问题，本申请提供一种图标区域的管理方法，该方法包括：In order to solve the above technical problems, the present application provides a method for managing icon areas, the method comprising:

获取第一图标和第二图标；Get the first icon and the second icon;

确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，第一图标和/或第二图标显示在上述区域显示位置；Determine the area display position of the target icon area, where the first icon and/or the second icon are displayed at the area display position;

将显示在上述区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标移动至非区域显示位置的预设图标显示位置；Moving icons other than the first icon and/or the second icon displayed at the above-mentioned area display position to a preset icon display position not at the area display position;

在区域显示位置生成目标图标区域，并将第一图标和第二图标显示或移动至目标图标区域中。A target icon area is generated at the area display position, and the first icon and the second icon are displayed or moved into the target icon area.

可选地，本申请的图标区域的管理方法，应用于智能终端。通过该方法，可以确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，该区域显示位置上显示有第一图标和/或第二图标，也就是说，可以根据第一图标和/或第二图标确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，便于用户对目标图标区域的快速查找，以及对显示或移动至目标图标区域的第一图标和第二图标的快速查找。Optionally, the icon region management method of the present application is applied to a smart terminal. Through this method, the area display position of the target icon area can be determined, and the area display position displays the first icon and/or the second icon, that is, the target icon area can be determined according to the first icon and/or the second icon The display position of the area is convenient for the user to quickly find the target icon area, and quickly find the first icon and the second icon displayed or moved to the target icon area.

为解决上述技术问题，本申请还提供一种图标区域的管理方法，该方法包括：In order to solve the above technical problems, the present application also provides a method for managing icon areas, the method comprising:

获取第一目标图标区域和第二目标图标区域；Obtain the first target icon area and the second target icon area;

根据所述第一目标图标区域的第一目标图标区域显示位置确定第三目标图标区域的区域显示位置，所述第一目标图标区域和/或所述第二目标图标区域显示在所述区域显示位置；The area display position of the third target icon area is determined according to the first target icon area display position of the first target icon area, and the first target icon area and/or the second target icon area are displayed on the area display Location;

将显示在所述区域显示位置的图标中除所述第一目标图标区域中图标和/或所述第二目标图标区域中图标以外的图标移动至非所述区域显示位置的预设图标显示位置；Moving the icons displayed in the area display position except the icon in the first target icon area and/or the icon in the second target icon area to a preset icon display position other than the area display position ;

在所述区域显示位置生成所述第三目标图标区域，并将所述第一目标图标区域中图标和所述目标图标区域中图标显示或移动至所述第三目标图标区域中。The third target icon area is generated at the area display position, and the icons in the first target icon area and the icons in the target icon area are displayed or moved into the third target icon area.

可选地，本申请的图标区域的管理方法，应用于智能终端。通过该方法，可以将根据第一目标图标区域显示位置确定第三目标图标区域的区域显示位置，也可以根据第一目标图标区域显示位置和第二目标图标区域显示位置确定第三目标图标区域的区域显示位置，便于用户对第三目标图标区域的查找。Optionally, the icon region management method of the present application is applied to a smart terminal. Through this method, the area display position of the third target icon area can be determined according to the display position of the first target icon area, and the area display position of the third target icon area can also be determined according to the display position of the first target icon area and the second target icon area. The location of the area is displayed, which is convenient for the user to find the area of the third target icon.

获取第一图标和第二图标；Get the first icon and the second icon;

确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，所述第一图标和/或所述第二图标显示在所述区域显示位置；determining an area display position of the target icon area, where the first icon and/or the second icon are displayed at the area display position;

在所述区域显示位置生成所述目标图标区域，并将所述第一图标和所述第二图标显示或移动至所述目标图标区域中。The target icon area is generated at the area display position, and the first icon and the second icon are displayed or moved into the target icon area.

可选地，本申请的图标区域的管理方法，应用于智能终端。通过该方法，可以按照一定的规律确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，便于用户对目标图标区域，以及第一图标和第二图标的查找。Optionally, the icon region management method of the present application is applied to a smart terminal. Through this method, the area display position of the target icon area can be determined according to a certain rule, which is convenient for the user to search for the target icon area, as well as the first icon and the second icon.

本申请还提供一种界面显示方法，该方法包括：The present application also provides an interface display method, the method comprising:

获取智能终端的至少一图标；Obtain at least one icon of the smart terminal;

确定所述至少一图标所属的目标图标区域，其中，所述目标图标区域包括至少两个图标子区域；determining a target icon area to which the at least one icon belongs, wherein the target icon area includes at least two icon sub-areas;

将所述至少一图标显示在所述目标图标区域的第一图标子区域，其中，在所述目标图标区域中所述第一图标子区域与第二图标子区域按预设模式显示，所述第二图标子区域为所述目标图标区域中除所述第一图标子区域以外的图标子区域。displaying the at least one icon in a first icon subarea of the target icon area, wherein the first icon subarea and the second icon subarea are displayed in a preset mode in the target icon area, the The second icon sub-area is an icon sub-area in the target icon area except for the first icon sub-area.

可选地，本申请的界面显示方法，应用于智能终端。通过该方法，可以实现对智能终端的至少一图标所对应应用的快速查找和/或启动。Optionally, the interface display method of the present application is applied to a smart terminal. Through this method, it is possible to quickly search and/or start an application corresponding to at least one icon of the smart terminal.

本申请还提供一种图标的处理方法，该方法包括：The present application also provides a method for processing icons, the method including:

获取目标聚类信息；Obtain target clustering information;

根据所述目标聚类信息确定至少一个图标，所述至少一个图标中的聚类信息与所述目标聚类信息相同；determining at least one icon according to the target clustering information, where the clustering information in the at least one icon is the same as the target clustering information;

将所述至少一个图标移动至目标图标区域中。and moving the at least one icon into the target icon area.

可选地，本申请的图标的处理方法，应用于智能终端。通过该方法，可以将聚类信息相同的图标移动至同一个图标区域中，从而实现用户方便快捷地将至少一个图标移动至目标图标区域中。Optionally, the icon processing method of the present application is applied to a smart terminal. Through this method, icons with the same clustering information can be moved to the same icon area, so that the user can conveniently and quickly move at least one icon to the target icon area.

于目标图标区域的目标图标子区域中显示的目标图标触发编辑指令；The target icon displayed in the target icon sub-area of the target icon area triggers an editing command;

按照选中或所述编辑指令对应的应用编辑功能对所述目标图标或者所述目标图标对应的应用进行处理。The target icon or the application corresponding to the target icon is processed according to the application editing function selected or corresponding to the editing instruction.

可选地，本申请的图标的处理方法，应用于智能终端。通过该方法，便于用户快捷地对目标图标区域的目标图标子区域中显示的目标图标或目标图标对应的应用进行处理。Optionally, the icon processing method of the present application is applied to a smart terminal. Through this method, it is convenient for the user to quickly process the target icon or the application corresponding to the target icon displayed in the target icon sub-area of the target icon area.

本申请还提供一种智能终端，包括：存储器、处理器，其中，所述存储器上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被所述处理器执行时实现如上述任一方法的步骤。The present application also provides an intelligent terminal, including: a memory and a processor, wherein a computer program is stored in the memory, and when the computer program is executed by the processor, the steps of any one of the above methods are implemented.

本申请还提供一种计算机存储介质，所述存储介质存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如上述任一方法的步骤。The present application also provides a computer storage medium, the storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of any one of the above methods are realized.

附图说明Description of drawings

此处的附图被并入说明书中并构成本说明书的一部分，示出了符合本申请的实施例，并与说明书一起用于解释本申请的原理。为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案，下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍，显而易见地，对于本领域普通技术人员而言，在不付出创造性劳动性的前提下，还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated in and constitute a part of this specification, illustrate embodiments consistent with the application and together with the description serve to explain the principles of the application. In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the accompanying drawings that need to be used in the description of the embodiments will be briefly introduced below. Obviously, for those of ordinary skill in the art, the Under the premise, other drawings can also be obtained based on these drawings.

图1为实现本申请各个实施例的一种移动终端的硬件结构示意图；FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application;

图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信网络***架构图；FIG. 2 is a system architecture diagram of a communication network provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图3为本申请实施例提供的一种图标区域的管理方法的流程示意图；FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for managing an icon area provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图4a为本申请实施例提供的一种图标的示意图；Fig. 4a is a schematic diagram of an icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图4b为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 4b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图4c为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 4c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图4d为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 4d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图4e为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 4e is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图4f为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 4f is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图4g为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 4g is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图4h为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 4h is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图4i为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 4i is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图5为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标区域的管理方法的流程示意图；FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of another icon area management method provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图6为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图7为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标区域的管理方法的流程示意图；FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of another icon area management method provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图8为本申请实施例提供的一种界面显示方法的流程示意图；FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of an interface display method provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图9a为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 9a is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图9b为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 9b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图9c为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 9c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图9d为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 9d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图9e为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 9e is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图9f为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 9f is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图9g为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 9g is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图10为本申请实施例提供的一种图标的处理方法的流程示意图；FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for processing icons provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图11a为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 11a is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图11b为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 11b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图11c为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 11c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图11d为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 11d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图11e为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 11e is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图11f为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 11f is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图11g为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 11g is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图11h为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 11h is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图11i为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 11i is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图11j为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 11j is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图12为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的处理方法的流程示意图；FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of another icon processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图13a为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 13a is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图13b为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 13b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图13c为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 13c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图13d为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 13d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图13e为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 13e is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图13f为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图；Fig. 13f is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application;

图13g为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图。Fig. 13g is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application.

本申请目的的实现、功能特点及优点将结合实施例，参照附图做进一步说明。通过上述附图，已示出本申请明确的实施例，后文中将有更详细的描述。这些附图和文字描述并不是为了通过任何方式限制本申请构思的范围，而是通过参考特定实施例为本领域技术人员说明本申请的概念。The realization, functional features and advantages of the present application will be further described in conjunction with the embodiments and with reference to the accompanying drawings. By means of the above drawings, specific embodiments of the present application have been shown, which will be described in more detail hereinafter. These drawings and text descriptions are not intended to limit the scope of the concept of the application in any way, but to illustrate the concept of the application for those skilled in the art by referring to specific embodiments.

具体实施方式Detailed ways

这里将详细地对示例性实施例进行说明，其示例表示在附图中。下面的描述涉及附图时，除非另有表示，不同附图中的相同数字表示相同或相似的要素。以下示例性实施例中所描述的实施方式并不代表与本申请相一致的所有实施方式。相反，它们仅是与如所附权利要求书中所详述的、本申请的一些方面相一致的装置和方法的例子。Reference will now be made in detail to the exemplary embodiments, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. When the following description refers to the accompanying drawings, the same numerals in different drawings refer to the same or similar elements unless otherwise indicated. The implementations described in the following exemplary embodiments do not represent all implementations consistent with this application. Rather, they are merely examples of apparatuses and methods consistent with aspects of the present application as recited in the appended claims.

需要说明的是，在本文中，术语“包括”、“包含”或者其任何其他变体意在涵盖非排他性的包含，从而使得包括一系列要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置不仅包括那些要素，而且还包括没有明确列出的其他要素，或者是还包括为这种过程、方法、物品或者装置所固有的要素。在没有更多限制的情况下，由语句“包括一个……”限定的要素，并不排除在包括该要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置中还存在另外的相同要素，此外，本申请不同实施例中具有同样命名的部件、特征、要素可能具有相同含义，也可能具有不同含义，其具体含义需以其在该具体实施例中的解释或者进一步结合该具体实施例中上下文进行确定。It should be noted that, in this document, the term "comprising", "comprising" or any other variation thereof is intended to cover a non-exclusive inclusion such that a process, method, article or apparatus comprising a set of elements includes not only those elements, It also includes other elements not expressly listed, or elements inherent in the process, method, article, or device. Without further limitations, an element defined by the phrase "comprising a..." does not exclude the existence of other identical elements in the process, method, article, or device that includes the element. In addition, different implementations of the present application Components, features, and elements with the same name in the example may have the same meaning, or may have different meanings, and the specific meaning shall be determined based on the explanation in the specific embodiment or further combined with the context in the specific embodiment.

应当理解，尽管在本文可能采用术语第一、第二、第三等来描述各种信息，但这些信息不应限于这些术语。这些术语仅用来将同一类型的信息彼此区分开。例如，在不脱离本文范围的情况下，第一信息也可以被称为第二信息，类似地，第二信息也可以被称为第一信息。取决于语境，如在此所使用的词语"如果"可以被解释成为“在……时”或“当……时”或“响应于确定”。再者，如同在本文中所使用的，单数形式“一”、“一个”和“该”旨在也包括复数形式，除非上下文中有相反的指示。应当进一步理解，术语“包含”、“包括”表明存在所述的特征、步骤、操作、元件、组件、项目、种类、和/或组，但不排除一个或多个其他特征、步骤、操作、元件、组件、项目、种类、和/或组的存在、出现或添加。本申请使用的术语“或”、“和/或”、“包括以下至少一个”等可被解释为包括性的，或意味着任一个或任何组合。例如，“包括以下至少一个：A、B、C”意味着“以下任一个：A；B；C；A和B；A和C；B和C；A和B和C”，再如，“A、B或C”或者“A、B和/或C”意味着“以下任一个：A；B；C；A和B；A和C；B和C；A和B和C”。仅当元件、功能、步骤或操作的组合在某些方式下内在地互相排斥时，才会出现该定义的例外。It should be understood that although the terms first, second, third, etc. may be used herein to describe various information, the information should not be limited to these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish information of the same type from one another. For example, without departing from the scope of this document, first information may also be called second information, and similarly, second information may also be called first information. Depending on the context, the word "if" as used herein may be interpreted as "at" or "when" or "in response to a determination". Furthermore, as used herein, the singular forms "a", "an" and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context indicates otherwise. It should be further understood that the terms "comprising", "comprising" indicate the presence of stated features, steps, operations, elements, components, items, species, and/or groups, but do not exclude one or more other features, steps, operations, The existence, occurrence or addition of an element, component, item, species, and/or group. The terms "or", "and/or", "comprising at least one of" and the like used in this application may be interpreted as inclusive, or mean any one or any combination. For example, "including at least one of the following: A, B, C" means "any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C", another example, " A, B or C" or "A, B and/or C" means "any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C". Exceptions to this definition will only arise when combinations of elements, functions, steps or operations are inherently mutually exclusive in some way.

应该理解的是，虽然本申请实施例中的流程图中的各个步骤按照箭头的指示依次显示，但是这些步骤并不是必然按照箭头指示的顺序依次执行。除非本文中有明确的说明，这些步骤的执行并没有严格的顺序限制，其可以以其他的顺序执行。而且，图中的至少一部分步骤可以包括多个子步骤或者多个阶段，这些子步骤或者阶段并不必然是在同一时刻执行完成，而是可以在不同的时刻执行，其执行顺序也不必然是依次进行，而是可以与其他步骤或者其他步骤的子步骤或者阶段的至少一部分轮流或者交替地执行。It should be understood that although the various steps in the flow chart in the embodiment of the present application are displayed sequentially as indicated by the arrows, these steps are not necessarily executed sequentially in the order indicated by the arrows. Unless otherwise specified herein, there is no strict order restriction on the execution of these steps, and they can be executed in other orders. Moreover, at least some of the steps in the figure may include multiple sub-steps or multiple stages, these sub-steps or stages are not necessarily executed at the same time, but may be executed at different times, and the execution order is not necessarily sequential Instead, it may be performed alternately or alternately with at least a part of other steps or sub-steps or stages of other steps.

取决于语境，如在此所使用的词语“如果”、“若”可以被解释成为“在……时”或“当……时”或“响应于确定”或“响应于检测”。类似地，取决于语境，短语“如果确定”或“如果检测(陈述的条件或事件)”可以被解释成为“当确定时”或“响应于确定”或“当检测(陈述的条件或事件)时”或“响应于检测(陈述的条件或事件)”。Depending on the context, the words "if", "if" as used herein may be interpreted as "at" or "when" or "in response to determining" or "in response to detecting". Similarly, depending on the context, the phrases "if determined" or "if detected (the stated condition or event)" could be interpreted as "when determined" or "in response to the determination" or "when detected (the stated condition or event) )" or "in response to detection of (a stated condition or event)".

需要说明的是，在本文中，采用了诸如S10、S20等步骤代号，其目的是为了更清楚简要地表述相应内容，不构成顺序上的实质性限制，本领域技术人员在具体实施时，可能会先执行S20后执行S10等，但这些均应在本申请的保护范围之内。It should be noted that, in this article, step codes such as S10 and S20 are used, the purpose of which is to express the corresponding content more clearly and concisely, and does not constitute a substantive limitation on the order. Those skilled in the art may, during specific implementation, S20 will be executed first, followed by S10, etc., but these should be within the scope of protection of this application.

应当理解，此处所描述的具体实施例仅仅用以解释本申请，并不用于限定本申请。It should be understood that the specific embodiments described here are only used to explain the present application, and are not intended to limit the present application.

在后续的描述中，使用用于表示元件的诸如“模块”、“部件”或“单元”的后缀仅为了有利于本申请的说明，其本身没有特定的意义。因此，“模块”、“部件”或“单元”可以混合地使用。In the following description, the use of suffixes such as 'module', 'part' or 'unit' for denoting elements is only for facilitating the description of the present application and has no specific meaning by itself. Therefore, 'module', 'part' or 'unit' may be used in combination.

本文中的图标区域的管理方法可以应用于智能终端，智能终端可以以各种形式来实施。例如，本申请中描述的智能终端可以包括诸如手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant，PDA)、便捷式媒体播放器(Portable Media Player，PMP)、导航装置、可穿戴设备、智能手环、计步器等移动终端，以及诸如数字TV、台式计算机等固定终端。The icon area management method herein can be applied to smart terminals, and smart terminals can be implemented in various forms. For example, the smart terminals described in this application may include mobile phones, tablet computers, notebook computers, palmtop computers, personal digital assistants (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), portable media players (Portable Media Player, PMP), navigation devices, Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers, and fixed terminals such as digital TVs and desktop computers.

后续描述中将以移动终端为例进行说明，本领域技术人员将理解的是，除了特别用于移动目的的元件之外，根据本申请的实施方式的构造也能够应用于固定类型的终端。In the subsequent description, a mobile terminal will be taken as an example, and those skilled in the art will understand that, in addition to elements specially used for mobile purposes, the configurations according to the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to fixed-type terminals.

请参阅图1，其为实现本申请各个实施例的一种移动终端的硬件结构示意图，该移动终端100可以包括：RF(Radio Frequency，射频)单元101、WiFi模块102、音频输出单元103、A/V(音频/视频)输入单元104、传感器105、显示单元106、用户输入单元107、接口单元108、存储器109、处理器110、以及电源111等部件。本领域技术人员可以理解，图1中示出的移动终端结构并不构成对移动终端的限定，移动终端可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。Please refer to FIG. 1 , which is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application. The mobile terminal 100 may include: an RF (Radio Frequency, radio frequency) unit 101, a WiFi module 102, an audio output unit 103, an A /V (audio/video) input unit 104, sensor 105, display unit 106, user input unit 107, interface unit 108, memory 109, processor 110, and power supply 111 and other components. Those skilled in the art can understand that the structure of the mobile terminal shown in Figure 1 does not constitute a limitation on the mobile terminal, and the mobile terminal may include more or less components than those shown in the figure, or combine some components, or different components layout.

下面结合图1对移动终端的各个部件进行具体的介绍：Each component of the mobile terminal is specifically introduced below in combination with FIG. 1:

射频单元101可用于收发信息或通话过程中，信号的接收和发送，具体的，将基站的下行信息接收后，给处理器110处理；另外，将上行的数据发送给基站。通常，射频单元101包括但不限于天线、至少一个放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器、双工器等。此外，射频单元101还可以通过无线通信与网络和其他设备通信。上述无线通信可以使用任一通信标准或协议，包括但不限于GSM(Global System of Mobile communication，全球移动通讯***)、GPRS(General Packet Radio Service，通用分组无线服务)、CDMA2000(Code Division Multiple Access 2000，码分多址2000)、WCDMA(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access，宽带码分多址)、TD-SCDMA(Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access，时分同步码分多址)、FDD-LTE(Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution，频分双工长期演进)、TDD-LTE(Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution，分时双工长期演进)和5G等。The radio frequency unit 101 can be used for sending and receiving information or receiving and sending signals during a call. Specifically, after receiving the downlink information of the base station, it is processed by the processor 110; in addition, the uplink data is sent to the base station. Generally, the radio frequency unit 101 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier, a duplexer, and the like. In addition, the radio frequency unit 101 can also communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication. The above wireless communication can use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to GSM (Global System of Mobile communication, Global System for Mobile Communications), GPRS (General Packet Radio Service, General Packet Radio Service), CDMA2000 (Code Division Multiple Access 2000 , Code Division Multiple Access 2000), WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access), TD-SCDMA (Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), FDD-LTE (Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, frequency division duplex long-term evolution), TDD-LTE (Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, time-division duplex long-term evolution) and 5G, etc.

WiFi属于短距离无线传输技术，移动终端通过WiFi模块102可以帮助用户收发电子邮件、浏览网页和访问流式媒体等，它为用户提供了无线的宽带互联网访问。虽然图1示出了WiFi模块102，但是可以理解的是，其并不属于移动终端的必须构成，完全可以根据需要在不改变申请的本质的范围内而省略。WiFi is a short-distance wireless transmission technology. The mobile terminal can help users send and receive emails, browse web pages, and access streaming media through the WiFi module 102, which provides users with wireless broadband Internet access. Although Fig. 1 shows the WiFi module 102, it can be understood that it is not an essential component of the mobile terminal, and can be completely omitted as required without changing the essence of the application.

音频输出单元103可以在移动终端100处于呼叫信号接收模式、通话模式、记录模式、语音识别模式、广播接收模式等等模式下时，将射频单元101或WiFi模块102接收的或者在存储器109中存储的音频数据转换成音频信号并且输出为声音。而且，音频输出单元103还可以提供与移动终端100执行的特定功能相关的音频输出(例如，呼叫信号接收声音、消息接收声音等等)。音频输出单元103可以包括扬声器、蜂鸣器等等。The audio output unit 103 can store the audio received by the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 or in the memory 109 when the mobile terminal 100 is in a call signal receiving mode, a call mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, a broadcast receiving mode, or the like. The audio data is converted into an audio signal and output as sound. Also, the audio output unit 103 can also provide audio output related to a specific function performed by the mobile terminal 100 (eg, call signal reception sound, message reception sound, etc.). The audio output unit 103 may include a speaker, a buzzer, and the like.

A/V输入单元104用于接收音频或视频信号。A/V输入单元104可以包括图形处理器(Graphics Processing Unit，GPU)1041和麦克风1042，图形处理器1041对在视频捕获模式或图像捕获模式中由图像捕获装置(如摄像头)获得的静态图片或视频的图像数据进行处理。处理后的图像帧可以显示在显示单元106上。经图形处理器1041处理后的图像帧可以存储在存储器109(或其它存储介质)中或者经由射频单元101或WiFi模块102进行发送。麦克风1042可以在电话通话模式、记录模式、语音识别模式等等运行模式中经由麦克风1042接收声音(音频数据)，并且能够将这样的声音处理为音频数据。处理后的音频(语音)数据可以在电话通话模式的情况下转换为可经由射频单元101发送到移动通信基站的格式输出。麦克风1042可以实施各种类型的噪声消除(或抑制)算法以消除(或抑制)在接收和发送音频信号的过程中产生的噪声或者干扰。The A/V input unit 104 is used to receive audio or video signals. The A/V input unit 104 may include a graphics processing unit (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU) 1041 and a microphone 1042, and the graphics processing unit 1041 is used for still pictures or The image data of the video is processed. The processed image frames may be displayed on the display unit 106 . The image frames processed by the graphics processor 1041 may be stored in the memory 109 (or other storage media) or sent via the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 . The microphone 1042 can receive sound (audio data) via the microphone 1042 in a phone call mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, and the like operating modes, and can process such sound as audio data. The processed audio (voice) data can be converted into a format transmittable to a mobile communication base station via the radio frequency unit 101 for output in case of a phone call mode. The microphone 1042 may implement various types of noise cancellation (or suppression) algorithms to cancel (or suppress) noise or interference generated in the process of receiving and transmitting audio signals.

移动终端100还包括至少一种传感器105，比如光传感器、运动传感器以及其他传感器。具体地，光传感器包括环境光传感器及接近传感器，可选地，环境光传感器可根据环境光线的明暗来调节显示面板1061的亮度，接近传感器可在移动终端100移动到耳边时，关闭显示面板1061和/或背光。作为运动传感器的一种，加速计传感器可检测各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小，静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向，可用于识别手机姿态的应用(比如横竖屏切换、相关游戏、磁力计姿态校准)、振动识别相关功能(比如计步器、敲击)等；至于手机还可配置的指纹传感器、压力传感器、虹膜传感器、分子传感器、陀螺仪、气压计、湿度计、温度计、红外线传感器等其他传感器，在此不再赘述。The mobile terminal 100 also includes at least one sensor 105, such as a light sensor, a motion sensor, and other sensors. Specifically, the light sensor includes an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor. Optionally, the ambient light sensor can adjust the brightness of the display panel 1061 according to the brightness of the ambient light, and the proximity sensor can turn off the display panel when the mobile terminal 100 moves to the ear. 1061 and/or backlight. As a kind of motion sensor, the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in various directions (generally three axes), and can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity when it is stationary, and can be used to identify the application of mobile phone posture (such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, related Games, magnetometer attitude calibration), vibration recognition related functions (such as pedometer, tap), etc.; as for mobile phones, fingerprint sensors, pressure sensors, iris sensors, molecular sensors, gyroscopes, barometers, hygrometers, Other sensors such as thermometers and infrared sensors will not be described in detail here.

显示单元106用于显示由用户输入的信息或提供给用户的信息。显示单元106可包括显示面板1061，可以采用液晶显示器(Liquid Crystal Display，LCD)、有机发光二极管(Organic Light-Emitting Diode，OLED)等形式来配置显示面板1061。The display unit 106 is used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user. The display unit 106 may include a display panel 1061, and the display panel 1061 may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display, LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (Organic Light-Emitting Diode, OLED), or the like.

用户输入单元107可用于接收输入的数字或字符信息，以及产生与移动终端的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。具体地，用户输入单元107可包括触控面板1071以及其他输入设备1072。触控面板1071，也称为触摸屏，可收集用户在其上或附近的触摸操作(比如用户使用手指、触笔等任何适合的物体或附件在触控面板1071上或在触控面板1071附近的操作)，并根据预先设定的程式驱动相应的连接装置。触控面板1071可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分。可选地，触摸检测装置检测用户的触摸方位，并检测触摸操作带来的信号，将信号传送给触摸控制器；触摸控制器从触摸检测装置上接收触摸信息，并将它转换成触点坐标，再送给处理器110，并能接收处理器110发来的命令并加以执行。此外，可以采用电阻式、电容式、红外线以及表面声波等多种类型实现触控面板1071。除了触控面板1071，用户输入单元107还可以包括其他输入设备1072。具体地，其他输入设备1072可以包括但不限于物理键盘、功能键(比如音量控制按键、开关按键等)、轨迹球、鼠标、操作杆等中的一种或多种，具体此处不做限定。The user input unit 107 can be used to receive input numbers or character information, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile terminal. Specifically, the user input unit 107 may include a touch panel 1071 and other input devices 1072 . The touch panel 1071, also referred to as a touch screen, can collect touch operations of the user on or near it (for example, the user uses any suitable object or accessory such as a finger or a stylus on the touch panel 1071 or near the touch panel 1071). operation), and drive the corresponding connection device according to the preset program. The touch panel 1071 may include two parts, a touch detection device and a touch controller. Optionally, the touch detection device detects the user's touch orientation, detects the signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives touch information from the touch detection device and converts it into contact coordinates , and then sent to the processor 110, and can receive the command sent by the processor 110 and execute it. In addition, the touch panel 1071 can be implemented in various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave. In addition to the touch panel 1071 , the user input unit 107 may also include other input devices 1072 . Specifically, other input devices 1072 may include, but are not limited to, one or more of physical keyboards, function keys (such as volume control buttons, switch buttons, etc.), trackballs, mice, joysticks, etc., which are not limited here. .

可选地，触控面板1071可覆盖显示面板1061，当触控面板1071检测到在其上或附近的触摸操作后，传送给处理器110以确定触摸事件的类型，随后处理器110根据触摸事件的类型在显示面板1061上提供相应的视觉输出。虽然在图1中，触控面板1071与显示面板1061是作为两个独立的部件来实现移动终端的输入和输出功能，但是在某些实施例中，可以将触控面板1071与显示面板1061集成而实现移动终端的输入和输出功能，具体此处不做限定。Optionally, the touch panel 1071 may cover the display panel 1061. When the touch panel 1071 detects a touch operation on or near it, it transmits to the processor 110 to determine the type of the touch event, and then the processor 110 determines the touch event according to the touch event. The corresponding visual output is provided on the display panel 1061 . Although in FIG. 1, the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 are used as two independent components to realize the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, in some embodiments, the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 can be integrated. The implementation of the input and output functions of the mobile terminal is not specifically limited here.

接口单元108用作至少一个外部装置与移动终端100连接可以通过的接口。例如，外部装置可以包括有线或无线头戴式耳机端口、外部电源(或电池充电器)端口、有线或无线数据端口、存储卡端口、用于连接具有识别模块的装置的端口、音频输入/输出(I/O)端口、视频I/O端口、耳机端口等等。接口单元108可以用于接收来自外部装置的输入(例如，数据信息、电力等等)并且将接收到的输入传输到移动终端100内的一个或多个元件或者可以用于在移动终端100和外部装置之间传输数据。The interface unit 108 serves as an interface through which at least one external device can be connected with the mobile terminal 100 . For example, an external device may include a wired or wireless headset port, an external power (or battery charger) port, a wired or wireless data port, a memory card port, a port for connecting a device with an identification module, audio input/output (I/O) ports, video I/O ports, headphone ports, and more. The interface unit 108 can be used to receive input from an external device (for example, data information, power, etc.) transfer data between devices.

存储器109可用于存储软件程序以及各种数据。存储器109可主要包括存储程序区和存储数据区，可选地，存储程序区可存储操作***、至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等；存储数据区可存储根据手机的使用所创建的数据(比如音频数据、电话本等)等。此外，存储器109可以包括高速随机存取存储器，还可以包括非易失性存储器，例如至少一个磁盘存储器件、闪存器件、或其他易失性固态存储器件。The memory 109 can be used to store software programs as well as various data. The memory 109 can mainly include a storage program area and a storage data area. Optionally, the storage program area can store an operating system, at least one function required application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) etc.; the storage data area can be Store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created according to the use of the mobile phone. In addition, the memory 109 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, or other volatile solid-state storage devices.

处理器110是移动终端的控制中心，利用各种接口和线路连接整个移动终端的各个部分，通过运行或执行存储在存储器109内的软件程序和/或模块，以及调用存储在存储器109内的数据，执行移动终端的各种功能和处理数据，从而对移动终端进行整体监控。处理器110可包括一个或多个处理单元；优选的，处理器110可集成应用处理器和调制解调处理器，可选地，应用处理器主要处理操作***、用户界面和应用程序等，调制解调处理器主要处理无线通信。可以理解的是，上述调制解调处理器也可以不集成到处理器110中。The processor 110 is the control center of the mobile terminal, and uses various interfaces and lines to connect various parts of the entire mobile terminal, by running or executing software programs and/or modules stored in the memory 109, and calling data stored in the memory 109 , execute various functions of the mobile terminal and process data, so as to monitor the mobile terminal as a whole. The processor 110 may include one or more processing units; preferably, the processor 110 may integrate an application processor and a modem processor. Optionally, the application processor mainly processes operating systems, user interfaces, and application programs, etc. The demodulation processor mainly handles wireless communication. It can be understood that the foregoing modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 110 .

移动终端100还可以包括给各个部件供电的电源111(比如电池)，优选的，电源111可以通过电源管理***与处理器110逻辑相连，从而通过电源管理***实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗管理等功能。The mobile terminal 100 can also include a power supply 111 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components. Preferably, the power supply 111 can be logically connected to the processor 110 through a power management system, so as to manage charging, discharging, and power consumption through the power management system. and other functions.

尽管图1未示出，移动终端100还可以包括蓝牙模块等，在此不再赘述。Although not shown in FIG. 1 , the mobile terminal 100 may also include a Bluetooth module, etc., which will not be repeated here.

为了便于理解本申请实施例，下面对本申请的移动终端所基于的通信网络***进行描述。In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following describes the communication network system on which the mobile terminal of the present application is based.

请参阅图2，图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信网络***架构图，该通信网络***为通用移动通信技术的LTE***，该LTE***包括依次通讯连接的UE(User Equipment，用户设备)201，E-UTRAN(Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network，演进式UMTS陆地无线接入网)202，EPC(Evolved Packet Core，演进式分组核心网)203和运营商的IP业务204。Please refer to Fig. 2, Fig. 2 is a kind of communication network system architecture diagram that the embodiment of the present application provides, and this communication network system is the LTE system of general mobile communication technology, and this LTE system includes the UE (User Equipment, user equipment) that communication connects sequentially ) 201, E-UTRAN (Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network, Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network) 202, EPC (Evolved Packet Core, Evolved Packet Core Network) 203 and the operator's IP service 204.

可选地，UE201可以是上述终端100，此处不再赘述。Optionally, the UE 201 may be the above-mentioned terminal 100, which will not be repeated here.

E-UTRAN202包括eNodeB2021和其它eNodeB2022等。可选地，eNodeB2021可以通过回程(backhaul)(例如X2接口)与其它eNodeB2022连接，eNodeB2021连接到EPC203，eNodeB2021可以提供UE201到EPC203的接入。 E-UTRAN 202 includes eNodeB 2021 and other eNodeB 2022 and so on. Optionally, the eNodeB 2021 can be connected to other eNodeB 2022 through a backhaul (for example, X2 interface), the eNodeB 2021 is connected to the EPC 203 , and the eNodeB 2021 can provide access from the UE 201 to the EPC 203 .

EPC203可以包括MME(Mobility Management Entity，移动性管理实体)2031，HSS(Home Subscriber Server，归属用户服务器)2032，其它MME2033，SGW(Serving Gate Way，服务网关)2034，PGW(PDN Gate Way，分组数据网络网关)2035和PCRF(Policy and Charging Rules Function，政策和资费功能实体)2036等。可选地，MME2031是处理UE201和EPC203之间信令的控制节点，提供承载和连接管理。HSS2032用于提供一些寄存器来管理诸如归属位置寄存器(图中未示)之类的功能，并且保存有一些有关服务特征、数据速率等用户专用的信息。所有用户数据都可以通过SGW2034进行发送，PGW2035可以提供UE 201的IP地址分配以及其它功能，PCRF2036是业务数据流和IP承载资源的策略与计费控制策略决策点，它为策略与计费执行功能单元(图中未示)选择及提供可用的策略和计费控制决策。EPC203 may include MME (Mobility Management Entity, Mobility Management Entity) 2031, HSS (Home Subscriber Server, Home Subscriber Server) 2032, other MME2033, SGW (Serving Gate Way, Serving Gateway) 2034, PGW (PDN Gate Way, packet data Network Gateway) 2035 and PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function, Policy and Charging Functional Entity) 2036, etc. Optionally, MME2031 is a control node that processes signaling between UE201 and EPC203, and provides bearer and connection management. HSS2032 is used to provide some registers to manage functions such as home location register (not shown in the figure), and save some user-specific information about service features and data rates. All user data can be sent through SGW2034, PGW2035 can provide UE 201 IP address allocation and other functions, PCRF2036 is the policy and charging control policy decision point of service data flow and IP bearer resources, it is the policy and charging execution function A unit (not shown) selects and provides available policy and charging control decisions.

IP业务204可以包括因特网、内联网、IMS(IP Multimedia Subsystem，IP多媒体子***)或其它IP业务等。The IP service 204 may include Internet, Intranet, IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem, IP Multimedia Subsystem) or other IP services.

虽然上述以LTE***为例进行了介绍，但本领域技术人员应当知晓，本申请不仅仅适用于LTE***，也可以适用于其他无线通信***，例如GSM、CDMA2000、WCDMA、TD-SCDMA以及未来新的网络***(如5G)等，此处不做限定。Although the LTE system is used as an example above, those skilled in the art should know that this application is not only applicable to the LTE system, but also applicable to other wireless communication systems, such as GSM, CDMA2000, WCDMA, TD-SCDMA and future new wireless communication systems. The network system (such as 5G), etc., is not limited here.

基于上述移动终端硬件结构以及通信网络***，提出本申请各个实施例。Based on the above mobile terminal hardware structure and communication network system, various embodiments of the present application are proposed.

下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be clearly and completely described below in conjunction with the drawings in the embodiments of the present application.

请参见图3所示的实施例，图3为本申请实施例提供的一种图标区域的管理方法的流程示意图，该方法可以应用于移动终端或者固定终端等智能终端，为便于阐述，本申请实施例以执行主体为移动终端为例进行说明。可选地，本实施例示出的图标区域的管理方法包括：Please refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for managing icon areas provided by the embodiment of the present application. This method can be applied to smart terminals such as mobile terminals or fixed terminals. For the convenience of illustration, this application The embodiment is described by taking the execution subject as a mobile terminal as an example. Optionally, the management method of the icon area shown in this embodiment includes:

S10、获取第一图标和第二图标。S10. Acquire a first icon and a second icon.

移动终端可以包括至少一个图标区域，其中，该至少一个图标区域中的各个图标区域可以指的是大文件夹或者应用卡片等。可以理解的是，移动终端中的图标区域包括至少一个图标子区域，且至少一个图标子区域中的任一图标子区域可以显示该图标区域中的任一图标。可选地，不同图标区域可以具有不同的区域标识，其中不同图标区域的区域标识可以是移动终端设置的，也可以是用户设置的。The mobile terminal may include at least one icon area, wherein each icon area in the at least one icon area may refer to a large folder or an application card or the like. It can be understood that the icon area in the mobile terminal includes at least one icon sub-area, and any icon sub-area in the at least one icon sub-area can display any icon in the icon area. Optionally, different icon areas may have different area identifications, wherein the area identifications of different icon areas may be set by the mobile terminal or by the user.

可选地，图标区域包含的图标可以指的是如下一种或多种：用于指示应用的图标(即应用所对应的图标)，用于指示应用功能的图标(可选地收款图标或者扫一扫图标等)，用于指示移动终端的功能的图标(可选地手电筒图标或者设置图标等)，用于指示内容的图标(可选地通知信息的图标或者会话内容的图标等)。Optionally, the icons contained in the icon area may refer to one or more of the following: an icon used to indicate an application (that is, an icon corresponding to the application), an icon used to indicate an application function (optionally a collection icon or scan icon, etc.), an icon used to indicate the function of the mobile terminal (optionally a flashlight icon or a setting icon, etc.), an icon used to indicate content (optionally an icon for notification information or an icon for conversation content, etc.).

为了便于阐述，后续均以图标区域指的是大文件夹，且图标区域中的图标指的是用于指示应用的图标为例进行说明。可以理解的是，图标区域区别于小文件夹的是：用户可以不展开图标区域，而对显示在该图标区域的图标子区域中的图标或者该图标所对应的应用进行操作。可选地，用户可以在不展开图标区域的情况下，点击显示在该图标区域的各个图标子区域中的任一图标，移动终端可以响应用户的点击操作，启动用户的点击操作所指示的图标所对应的应用。For ease of explanation, the following descriptions will be made by taking the icon area as an example referring to a large folder, and the icon in the icon area as an example for indicating an application. It can be understood that the difference between the icon area and the small folder is that the user can operate the icon displayed in the icon sub-area of the icon area or the application corresponding to the icon without expanding the icon area. Optionally, the user can click any icon displayed in each icon sub-area of the icon area without expanding the icon area, and the mobile terminal can respond to the user's click operation and activate the icon indicated by the user's click operation. corresponding application.

可选地，移动终端可以包括锁定图标区域，用户仅能对该锁定图标区域中的图标执行启动操作，以启动该启动操作所指示的图标对应的程序，如启动该图标对应的应用等。但是，用户不能对该锁定图标区域中的图标执行其他操作，例如移出或者卸载等操作。Optionally, the mobile terminal may include a lock icon area, and the user can only perform a start operation on icons in the lock icon area to start a program corresponding to the icon indicated by the start operation, such as start an application corresponding to the icon. However, the user cannot perform other operations on the icons in the locked icon area, such as operations such as moving out or uninstalling.

可选地，移动终端可以将显示屏幕中的任一图标作为第一图标，并可以将显示屏幕中除第一图标以外的任一图标作为第二图标。可选地，第二图标的数量可以为多个，也就是说，移动终端可以将显示屏幕中除第一图标以外的图标中的多个图标作为第二图标。Optionally, the mobile terminal may use any icon on the display screen as the first icon, and may use any icon on the display screen other than the first icon as the second icon. Optionally, there may be multiple second icons, that is to say, the mobile terminal may use a plurality of icons in the display screen other than the first icon as the second icon.

可选地，移动终端可以于显示屏幕中的一个或多个图标触发滑动指令，该滑动指令所指示的滑动轨迹的终点位置位于显示屏幕中除上述一个或多个图标以外的任一图标所在的图标显示位置，那么移动终端可以将终点位置所在的图标显示位置上显示的图标作为第一图标，并将上述一个或多个图标作为第二图标。可选地，如果用户对显示屏幕中的一个或多个图标进行了滑动操作，那么移动终端可以于上述一个或多个图标触发滑动指令。Optionally, the mobile terminal may trigger a sliding instruction on one or more icons on the display screen, and the end position of the sliding track indicated by the sliding instruction is located where any icon other than the above-mentioned one or more icons is located on the display screen. icon display position, then the mobile terminal may use the icon displayed at the icon display position where the end point is located as the first icon, and use the above one or more icons as the second icon. Optionally, if the user performs a sliding operation on one or more icons on the display screen, the mobile terminal may trigger a sliding instruction on the one or more icons.

例如，图4a为本申请实施例提供的一种图标的示意图，如图4a所示，410为移动终端的显示界面，显示界面410包括图标A、B以及C，如果用户对图标A进行了滑动操作，该滑动操作所指示的滑动轨迹的终点位置位于图标B所在的图标显示位置，那么移动终端可以将图标B作为第一图标，并将图标A作为第二图标。For example, FIG. 4a is a schematic diagram of an icon provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4a, 410 is the display interface of the mobile terminal, and the display interface 410 includes icons A, B, and C. If the user slides the icon A operation, the end position of the sliding track indicated by the sliding operation is located at the icon display position where the icon B is located, then the mobile terminal can use the icon B as the first icon and the icon A as the second icon.

S20、确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，第一图标和/或第二图标显示在区域显示位置。S20. Determine an area display position of the target icon area, where the first icon and/or the second icon are displayed at the area display position.

可选地，移动终端可以将显示有第一图标的任一区域显示位置作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置。例如，如图4a所示，以第一图标为图标B为例，移动终端可以将区域显示位置411作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置，其中区域显示位置411上显示有第一图标。Optionally, the mobile terminal may use any area display position where the first icon is displayed as the area display position of the target icon area. For example, as shown in FIG. 4a, taking the first icon as icon B as an example, the mobile terminal may use the area display position 411 as the area display position of the target icon area, wherein the area display position 411 displays the first icon.

S30、将显示在区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标移动至非区域显示位置的预设图标显示位置。S30. Among the icons displayed at the area display position, the icons other than the first icon and/or the second icon are moved to a preset icon display position not at the area display position.

上述预设图标显示位置可以指的是显示屏幕中能够用于显示图标的任一图标显示位置。可选地，上述预设图标显示位置可以包括但不限于：空置图标显示位置、非空置图标显示位置，等等。可选地，空置图标显示位置可以指的是能够用于显示图标，且在当前***时间下未显示有任一图标的图标显示位置；非空置图标显示位置可以指的是能够用于显示图标，且当前***时间下显示有任一图标的图标显示位置。The aforementioned preset icon display position may refer to any icon display position that can be used to display icons on the display screen. Optionally, the above preset icon display positions may include but not limited to: vacant icon display positions, non-vacant icon display positions, and so on. Optionally, a vacant icon display location may refer to an icon display location that can be used to display icons and does not display any icon at the current system time; a non-vacant icon display location may refer to an icon display location that can be used to display icons, And the icon display position of any icon is displayed under the current system time.

可选地，图4b为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图4b所示，显示界面430包含图标A、B、C以及D，以第一图标为图标B为例，虚线所构成的最小显示区域为显示界面430中的各个图标显示位置，假设预设图标显示位置指的是空置图标显示位置，那么未显示有任一图标的图标显示位置即为预设图标显示位置。假设移动终端将区域显示位置431作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置，由于显示在区域显示位置431的图标包括图标B和图标C，那么移动终端可以将图标C移动至预设图标显示位置，如图标显示位置432。若移动终端将图标C移动至图标显示位置432，那么移动终端可以将图标C显示在图标显示位置441上。Optionally, FIG. 4b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4b, the display interface 430 includes icons A, B, C, and D. Taking the first icon as icon B as an example, the dotted line The formed minimum display area is each icon display position in the display interface 430 , assuming that the default icon display position refers to an empty icon display position, then the icon display position not displaying any icon is the default icon display position. Assuming that the mobile terminal uses the area display position 431 as the area display position of the target icon area, since the icons displayed at the area display position 431 include icon B and icon C, the mobile terminal can move icon C to the preset icon display position, such as icon Position 432 is displayed. If the mobile terminal moves the icon C to the icon display position 432 , then the mobile terminal can display the icon C on the icon display position 441 .

可选地，图4c为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图4c所示，以第一图标为图标B为例，虚线所构成的最小显示区域为显示界面450中的各个图标显示位置，假设预设图标显示位置为图标D所在的图标显示位置，且移动终端将区域显示位置451作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置，由于显示在区域显示位置451的图标包括图标B和图标C，那么移动终端可以将图标C移动至预设图标显示位置(即图标D所在的图标显示位置)，从而得到显示界面460。可选地，当移动终端将图标C移动至图标D所在的图标显示位置时，移动终端可以将图标D显示在显示屏幕中的任一空置图标显示位置。Optionally, FIG. 4c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4c, taking the first icon as icon B as an example, the minimum display area formed by the dotted line is each of the icons in the display interface 450. Icon display position, assuming that the default icon display position is the icon display position where icon D is located, and the mobile terminal regards the area display position 451 as the area display position of the target icon area, since the icons displayed at area display position 451 include icon B and icon C, then the mobile terminal can move the icon C to a preset icon display position (that is, the icon display position where the icon D is located), so as to obtain the display interface 460 . Optionally, when the mobile terminal moves the icon C to the icon display position where the icon D is located, the mobile terminal may display the icon D in any vacant icon display position on the display screen.

可选地，预设图标显示位置的数量为多个，移动终端将显示在区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标移动至非区域显示位置的预设图标显示位置的具体实施过程可以为：针对显示在区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标中的至少一个图标，确定与至少一个图标的距离最近的预设图标显示位置；将至少一个图标移动至确定的预设图标显示位置。Optionally, the number of preset icon display positions is multiple, and the mobile terminal moves icons other than the first icon and/or the second icon displayed in the area display position to the preset icon display in the non-area display position The specific implementation process of the position may be: for at least one icon among the icons displayed in the area display position except the first icon and/or the second icon, determine the preset icon display position closest to the at least one icon ; Move at least one icon to the determined preset icon display position.

例如，如图4c所示，以第一图标为图标B、第二图标为图标A为例，假设目标图标区域的区域显示位置为区域显示位置451，由于显示在区域显示位置451的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标包括图标C，那么移动终端可以确定与图标C的距离最近的预设图标显示位置为图标D所在的图标显示位置，并将图标C移动至确定的预设图标显示位置，从而将图标C显示在图标D所在的图标显示位置上。For example, as shown in FIG. 4c, taking the first icon as icon B and the second icon as icon A as an example, assuming that the area display position of the target icon area is area display position 451, since icons displayed at area display position 451 except Icons other than the first icon and/or the second icon include icon C, then the mobile terminal can determine that the preset icon display position closest to icon C is the icon display position where icon D is located, and move icon C to the determined The icon display position is preset, so that the icon C is displayed at the icon display position where the icon D is located.

S40、在区域显示位置生成目标图标区域，并将第一图标和第二图标显示或移动至目标图标区域中。S40. Generate a target icon area at the area display position, and display or move the first icon and the second icon into the target icon area.

可选地，当第一图标和第二图标显示在区域显示位置时，移动终端可以将第一图标和第二图标显示在目标图标区域中；当第一图标显示在区域显示位置，第二图标显示在非区域显示位置，那么移动终端可以将第一图标显示在目标图标区域中，将第二图标移动至目标图标区域并将第二图标显示在目标图标区域中。可选地，当第一图标和第二图标相邻，即第一图标所在的图标显示位置和第二图标所在的图标显示位置相邻，那么移动终端可以直接将第一图标和第二图标显示在目标图标区域中，而不存在将第一图标和/或第二图标移动至目标图标区域的操作。Optionally, when the first icon and the second icon are displayed at the area display position, the mobile terminal may display the first icon and the second icon in the target icon area; when the first icon is displayed at the area display position, the second icon display in the non-area display position, then the mobile terminal can display the first icon in the target icon area, move the second icon to the target icon area and display the second icon in the target icon area. Optionally, when the first icon is adjacent to the second icon, that is, the icon display position where the first icon is located is adjacent to the icon display position where the second icon is located, then the mobile terminal can directly display the first icon and the second icon In the target icon area, there is no operation of moving the first icon and/or the second icon to the target icon area.

可选地，如图4a所示，假设目标图标区域的区域显示位置为区域显示位置411，第一图标为图标B，且第二图标为图标A，那么移动终端可以在区域显示位置411中生成目标图标区域，并将第一图标和第二图标显示或移动至目标图标区域中，从而得到显示界面420。显示界面420中的目标图标区域(即图标区域421)的区域显示位置为区域显示位置422，目标图标区域中的图标包括第一图标和第二图标，且目标图标区域包括四个图标子区域。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 4a, assuming that the area display position of the target icon area is area display position 411, the first icon is icon B, and the second icon is icon A, then the mobile terminal may generate the target icon area, and display or move the first icon and the second icon to the target icon area, so as to obtain the display interface 420 . The area display position of the target icon area (ie icon area 421 ) in the display interface 420 is the area display position 422 , the icons in the target icon area include the first icon and the second icon, and the target icon area includes four icon sub-areas.

可选地，移动终端可确定第一图标的第一图标显示位置，并根据第一图标显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置。其中，在确定第一图标的第一图标显示位置时，可以将第一图标所在的图标显示位置作为第一图标显示位置，例如，如图4a所示，以第一图标为图标B为例，移动终端可以将图标B所在的图标显示位置(即图标显示位置412)作为第一图标显示位置。Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine the first icon display position of the first icon, and determine the area display position of the target icon area according to the first icon display position. Wherein, when determining the first icon display position of the first icon, the icon display position where the first icon is located can be used as the first icon display position. For example, as shown in FIG. 4a, taking the first icon as icon B as an example, The mobile terminal may use the icon display position where the icon B is located (ie, the icon display position 412 ) as the first icon display position.

可选地，在根据第一图标显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置之前，移动终端可以确定第二图标的第二图标显示位置，并根据第一图标显示位置以及第二图标显示位置，确定不满足预设条件，预设条件为根据第一图标显示位置以及第二图标显示位置确定上述区域显示位置的条件，触发执行根据第一图标显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置。Optionally, before determining the area display position of the target icon area according to the first icon display position, the mobile terminal may determine the second icon display position of the second icon, and determine according to the first icon display position and the second icon display position If the preset condition is not satisfied, the preset condition is a condition for determining the above-mentioned area display position according to the first icon display position and the second icon display position, triggering the determination of the area display position of the target icon area according to the first icon display position.

上述第二图标显示位置可以指的是第二图标所在的图标显示位置。上述预设条件可以指的是第二图标显示位置位于目标显示区域中，该目标显示区域可以指的是以第一图标显示位置为中心，形成的m*n的显示区域，也就是说，目标显示区域可以包含m*n个图标显示位置，可选地，m为正整数，n为正整数。The above-mentioned second icon display position may refer to the icon display position where the second icon is located. The above preset condition may mean that the second icon display position is located in the target display area, and the target display area may refer to the m*n display area formed with the first icon display position as the center, that is, the target The display area may contain m*n icon display positions, optionally, m is a positive integer, and n is a positive integer.

可选地，移动终端可以根据目标图标区域的预设尺寸确定m和n的值，目标图标区域的预设尺寸可以描述目标图标区域包含的图标子区域的数量，以及目标图标区域包含的图标子区域的分布方式。可以理解的是，目标显示区域可以包含目标图标区域的各个可能的区域显示位置，各个可能的区域显示位置上均显示有第一图标，即目标显示区域可以包含显示有第一图标的各个区域显示位置，且显示有第一图标的各个区域显示位置包含的图标显示位置的数量与目标图标区域的预设尺寸所指示的图标子区域的数量相同。Optionally, the mobile terminal can determine the values of m and n according to the preset size of the target icon area. The preset size of the target icon area can describe the number of icon sub-areas contained in the target icon area, and the number of icon sub-areas contained in the target icon area. How the regions are distributed. It can be understood that the target display area may include each possible area display position of the target icon area, each possible area display position displays the first icon, that is, the target display area may include each area display area where the first icon is displayed. The number of icon display positions included in each area display position where the first icon is displayed is the same as the number of icon sub-areas indicated by the preset size of the target icon area.

可选地，假设目标图标区域的预设尺寸为2*2，即目标图标区域可以包含4个图标子区域，目标图标区域包含的图标子区域分布为2行，每行包含2个图标子区域，每个图标子区域的尺寸是预先设置的，且所有图标子区域的尺寸均相同，那么目标显示区域可以包含目标图标区域的4个可能的区域显示位置，每个可能的区域显示位置包含4个图标显示位置，且每个可能的区域显示位置上显示有第一图标。可以理解的是，目标显示区域可以指的是以第一图标显示位置为中心，形成的3*3的显示区域。Optionally, assume that the preset size of the target icon area is 2*2, that is, the target icon area can contain 4 icon sub-areas, and the icon sub-areas contained in the target icon area are distributed in 2 rows, and each row contains 2 icon sub-areas , the size of each icon sub-area is preset, and all icon sub-areas have the same size, then the target display area can contain 4 possible area display positions of the target icon area, and each possible area display position includes 4 icon display positions, and each possible area display position is displayed with a first icon. It can be understood that the target display area may refer to a 3*3 display area formed with the first icon display position as the center.

可选地，图4d为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图4d所示，以第一图标为图标B为例，假设目标图标区域的预设尺寸为2*2，那么目标显示区域(即显示区域471)可以指的是以第一图标显示位置为中心，形成的3*3的显示区域。若第二图标为图标A，那么第二图标显示位置(即图标A所在的图标显示位置)不位于目标显示区域中，则移动终端可以根据第一图标显示位置以及第二图标显示位置，确定不满足预设条件，则可以触发执行根据第一图标显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置。Optionally, FIG. 4d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4d, taking the first icon as icon B as an example, assuming that the preset size of the target icon area is 2*2, then The target display area (ie, the display area 471 ) may refer to a 3*3 display area formed with the first icon display position as the center. If the second icon is icon A, then the second icon display position (that is, the icon display position where icon A is located) is not located in the target display area, then the mobile terminal can determine whether the icon is displayed according to the first icon display position and the second icon display position. Satisfying the preset condition may trigger execution of determining the area display position of the target icon area according to the first icon display position.

可选地，移动终端可以将包含第一图标显示位置的任一区域显示位置作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置，也就是说，移动终端可以将显示有第一图标的任一区域显示位置作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置。Optionally, the mobile terminal may use any area display position including the first icon display position as the area display position of the target icon area, that is, the mobile terminal may use any area display position where the first icon is displayed as the target area display position. The area of the icon area shows the location.

可选地，如图4b所示，以第一图标为图标B，第二图标为图标A为例，根据第一图标显示位置(即图标B所在的图标显示位置)，移动终端可以将区域显示位置431作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置，区域显示位置431中包括第一图标显示位置，即区域显示位置431上显示有第一图标。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 4b, taking the first icon as icon B and the second icon as icon A as an example, according to the display position of the first icon (that is, the icon display position where icon B is located), the mobile terminal can display the area The position 431 is used as the area display position of the target icon area, and the area display position 431 includes the first icon display position, that is, the first icon is displayed on the area display position 431 .

可选地，移动终端可以确定显示有第一图标的各个区域显示位置的区域优先级，并根据区域优先级以及第一图标显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置。可以理解的是，移动终端可以根据区域优先级，依次确定显示有第一图标的区域显示位置，直至根据区域优先级确定的区域显示位置满足图标区域显示条件，则将满足图标区域显示条件的区域显示位置作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置。上述图标区域显示条件可以指的是区域显示位置不包括除第一图标以外的任一图标，也可以指的是区域显示位置中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标的数量小于或等于第一图标所在的桌面显示界面中的预设图标显示位置的数量，本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine the area priority of each area display position where the first icon is displayed, and determine the area display position of the target icon area according to the area priority and the first icon display position. It can be understood that the mobile terminal may sequentially determine the area display position where the first icon is displayed according to the area priority until the area display position determined according to the area priority satisfies the icon area display condition, then the area that meets the icon area display condition The display position is the area display position of the target icon area. The above icon area display condition may refer to that the area display position does not include any icon other than the first icon, and may also refer to that the number of icons other than the first icon and/or the second icon in the area display position is less than or It is equal to the number of preset icon display positions in the desktop display interface where the first icon is located, which is not limited in the present application.

可选地，当目标显示区域指的是以第一图标显示位置为中心，形成的3*3的显示区域时，显示有第一图标的各个区域显示位置的区域优先级从高到低的顺序可以为：位于目标显示区域左上的区域显示位置、位于目标显示区域右上的区域显示位置、位于目标显示区域左下的区域显示位置以及位于目标显示区域右下的区域显示位置。可以理解的是，位于目标显示区域左上的区域显示位置可以指的是：位于目标显示区域，且该区域显示位置中除第一图标显示位置以外的图标显示位置均位于第一图标显示位置的左边、上边或左上的区域显示位置；位于目标显示区域右上的区域显示位置可以指的是：位于目标显示区域，且该区域显示位置中除第一图标显示位置以外的图标显示位置均位于第一图标显示位置的右边、上边或右上的区域显示位置；位于目标显示区域左下的区域显示位置可以指的是：位于目标显示区域，且该区域显示位置中除第一图标显示位置以外的图标显示位置均位于第一图标显示位置的左边、下边或左下的区域显示位置；位于目标显示区域右下的区域显示位置可以指的是：位于目标显示区域，且该区域显示位置中除第一图标显示位置以外的图标显示位置均位于第一图标显示位置的右边、下边或右下的区域显示位置。Optionally, when the target display area refers to a 3*3 display area formed with the first icon display position as the center, the order of area priority of each area display position where the first icon is displayed is from high to low Can be: the area display position at the upper left of the target display area, the area display position at the upper right of the target display area, the area display position at the lower left of the target display area, and the area display position at the lower right of the target display area. It can be understood that the area display position located on the upper left of the target display area may refer to: it is located in the target display area, and the icon display positions in the area display position except the first icon display position are all located on the left side of the first icon display position , the upper or upper left area display position; the area display position located at the upper right of the target display area may refer to: it is located in the target display area, and the icon display positions in this area display position except the first icon display position are all located in the first icon display position The area display position on the right, top, or upper right of the display position; the area display position located at the lower left of the target display area may refer to: it is located in the target display area, and the icon display positions in this area display position except for the first icon display position are all The area display position located on the left, below or lower left of the first icon display position; the area display position located at the lower right of the target display area may refer to: it is located in the target display area, and the area display position is other than the first icon display position The display positions of the icons are all located at the right, bottom or lower right area display position of the first icon display position.

可选地，图4e为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图4e所示，以第一图标为图标B为例，那么目标显示区域可以指的是以第一图标显示位置(即图标B所在的图标显示位置)为中心，形成的3*3的显示区域，移动终端可以根据区域优先级以及第一图标显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置。根据显示有第一图标的各个区域显示位置的区域优先级，移动终端可以首先确定位于目标显示区域左上的区域显示位置(即区域显示位置481)是否满足图标区域显示条件，其中区域显示位置481位于目标显示区域，区域显示位置481中除第一图标显示位置以外的图标显示位置包括图标显示位置482(即图标D所在的图标显示位置)、图标显示位置483以及图标显示位置484(即图标E所在的图标显示位置)，且图标显示位置482位于第一图标显示位置的左边，图标显示位置483位于第一图标显示位置的上边，图标显示位置484位于第一图标显示位置的左上。假设图标区域显示条件指的是区域显示位置不包括除第一图标以外的任一图标，由于区域显示位置481还包含图标E和图标D，那么移动终端可以确定区域显示位置481不满足图标区域显示条件。然后，移动终端可以确定位于目标显示区域右上的区域显示位置(即区域显示位置491)是否满足图标区域显示条件，其中区域显示位置491位于目标显示区域，区域显示位置491中除第一图标显示位置以外的图标显示位置包括图标显示位置492、图标显示位置493以及图标显示位置494，且图标显示位置492位于第一图标显示位置的右边，图标显示位置493位于第一图标显示位置的上边，图标显示位置494位于第一图标显示位置的右上。由于区域显示位置491不包括除第一图标以外的任一图标，那么移动终端可以确定区域显示位置491满足图标区域显示条件，并将区域显示位置491作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置。可以理解的是，假设区域显示位置491不满足图标区域显示条件，那么移动终端可以依次确定位于目标显示区域左下的区域显示位置(即包含图标显示位置482、图标显示位置485、图标显示位置486以及第一图标显示位置的区域显示位置)以及位于目标显示区域右下的区域显示位置(即包含图标显示位置486、图标显示位置487、图标显示位置488以及第一图标显示位置的区域显示位置)是否满足图标区域显示条件，并将满足图标区域显示条件的区域显示位置作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置。Optionally, FIG. 4e is a schematic diagram of another icon provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4e, taking the first icon as icon B as an example, the target display area may refer to the display position of the first icon (that is, the icon display position where icon B is located) as the center to form a 3*3 display area, and the mobile terminal can determine the area display position of the target icon area according to the area priority and the first icon display position. According to the area priority of each area display position where the first icon is displayed, the mobile terminal can first determine whether the area display position (that is, the area display position 481) located on the upper left of the target display area meets the icon area display condition, wherein the area display position 481 is located at In the target display area, icon display positions other than the first icon display position in area display position 481 include icon display position 482 (that is, the icon display position where icon D is located), icon display position 483, and icon display position 484 (that is, icon E is located). icon display position), and the icon display position 482 is located at the left of the first icon display position, the icon display position 483 is located at the top of the first icon display position, and the icon display position 484 is located at the upper left of the first icon display position. Assuming that the icon area display condition refers to that the area display position does not include any icon other than the first icon, since the area display position 481 also contains icons E and D, the mobile terminal can determine that the area display position 481 does not satisfy the icon area display requirement. condition. Then, the mobile terminal can determine whether the area display position (i.e. area display position 491) at the upper right of the target display area satisfies the icon area display condition, wherein the area display position 491 is located in the target display area, and the area display position 491 except the first icon display position Other icon display positions include icon display position 492, icon display position 493 and icon display position 494, and icon display position 492 is located on the right side of the first icon display position, icon display position 493 is located on the top of the first icon display position, icon display Position 494 is located to the upper right of the first icon display position. Since the area display position 491 does not include any icon except the first icon, the mobile terminal may determine that the area display position 491 satisfies the icon area display condition, and use the area display position 491 as the area display position of the target icon area. It can be understood that, assuming that the area display position 491 does not satisfy the icon area display condition, then the mobile terminal can sequentially determine the area display positions located at the lower left of the target display area (that is, including icon display position 482, icon display position 485, icon display position 486 and Whether the area display position of the first icon display position) and the area display position located at the lower right of the target display area (that is, the area display position including icon display position 486, icon display position 487, icon display position 488, and the first icon display position) The icon area display condition is met, and the area display position satisfying the icon area display condition is used as the area display position of the target icon area.

可选地，上述各个区域显示位置的区域优先级从高到低的顺序也可以为：位于目标显示区域右上的区域显示位置、位于目标显示区域左上的区域显示位置、位于目标显示区域右下的区域显示位置以及位于目标显示区域左下的区域显示位置，本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, the order of the area priorities of the above-mentioned various area display positions from high to low may also be: the area display position located at the upper right of the target display area, the area display position located at the upper left of the target display area, the area display position located at the lower right of the target display area The area display position and the area display position located at the lower left of the target display area are not limited in this application.

可选地，移动终端可以确定第二图标的第二图标显示位置；若第一图标显示位置以及第二图标显示位置不满足预设条件，触发执行根据第一图标显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置；若满足预设条件，触发执行根据第一图标显示位置以及第二图标显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置。Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine the second icon display position of the second icon; if the first icon display position and the second icon display position do not meet the preset condition, trigger execution to determine the area of the target icon area according to the first icon display position Display position; if the preset condition is met, trigger execution to determine the area display position of the target icon area according to the first icon display position and the second icon display position.

可选地，预设条件可以指的是：第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置之间的距离与目标图标区域的预设尺寸相匹配，即第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置之间的距离小于或等于预设区域长度。可以理解的是，若第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置之间的距离小于或等于预设区域长度，即上述距离和目标图标区域的预设尺寸相匹配，则满足预设条件。可选地，移动终端可以根据目标图标区域的预设尺寸确定预设区域长度，且预设尺寸确定预设区域长度的具体实施过程可以为：根据预设尺寸确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置包含的图标显示位置的数量以及图标显示位置的分布方式，从而将上述区域显示位置的对角线长度作为上述预设区域长度。可选地，假设预设尺寸为2*2，那么移动终端可以确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置所包含的图标显示位置的数量为4，且所包含的图标显示位置分布为2行，每行包含2个图标显示位置，从而确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置的对角线长度。Optionally, the preset condition may refer to: the distance between the first icon display position and the second icon display position matches the preset size of the target icon area, that is, the first icon display position and the second icon display position The distance between them is less than or equal to the preset area length. It can be understood that if the distance between the first icon display position and the second icon display position is less than or equal to the length of the preset area, that is, the distance matches the preset size of the target icon area, then the preset condition is met. Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine the preset area length according to the preset size of the target icon area, and the specific implementation process of determining the preset area length by the preset size may be: determine the area display position of the target icon area according to the preset size including The number of icon display positions and the distribution of the icon display positions, so that the diagonal length of the above-mentioned area display positions is used as the above-mentioned preset area length. Optionally, assuming that the preset size is 2*2, then the mobile terminal may determine that the number of icon display positions contained in the area display position of the target icon area is 4, and the contained icon display positions are distributed into 2 rows, and each row Two icon display positions are included, so as to determine the diagonal length of the area display position of the target icon area.

可以理解的是，当且仅当第二图标显示位置位于目标显示区域中时，第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置之间的距离和目标图标区域的预设尺寸相匹配，即第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置之间的距离小于或等于预设区域长度。It can be understood that, if and only when the second icon display position is located in the target display area, the distance between the first icon display position and the second icon display position matches the preset size of the target icon area, that is, the first The distance between the icon display position and the second icon display position is less than or equal to the preset area length.

例如，如图4d所示，以第一图标为图标B为例，假设目标图标区域的预设尺寸为3*3，那么目标显示区域(即显示区域471)可以指的是以第一图标显示位置为中心，形成的3*3的显示区域。若第二图标为图标C，则第二图标显示位置(即图标C所在的图标显示位置)位于目标显示区域中，也就是说，第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置之间的距离和目标图标区域的预设尺寸相匹配，那么移动终端可以根据第一图标显示位置以及第二图标显示位置，确定满足预设条件，从而触发执行根据第一图标显示位置以及第二图标显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置。For example, as shown in Figure 4d, taking the first icon as icon B as an example, assuming that the preset size of the target icon area is 3*3, then the target display area (ie, the display area 471) can refer to the first icon displayed The position is the center, forming a 3*3 display area. If the second icon is icon C, then the second icon display position (that is, the icon display position where icon C is located) is located in the target display area, that is to say, the distance between the first icon display position and the second icon display position and If the preset size of the target icon area matches, the mobile terminal can determine that the preset condition is met according to the first icon display position and the second icon display position, thereby triggering the execution of determining the target according to the first icon display position and the second icon display position The area of the icon area shows the location.

可选地，移动终端根据第一图标显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置的具体实施过程可以如步骤s11和步骤s12所示：Optionally, the specific implementation process for the mobile terminal to determine the area display position of the target icon area according to the first icon display position may be shown in steps s11 and s12:

s11、确定第二图标的第二图标显示位置。s11. Determine a second icon display position of the second icon.

例如，图4f为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图4f所示，假设第二图标为图标A，那么移动终端可以将图标A所在的图标显示位置作为第二图标显示位置。For example, FIG. 4f is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4f, assuming that the second icon is icon A, then the mobile terminal can use the icon display position where icon A is located as the second icon display position .

可选地，第二图标的数量为至少两个，移动终端确定第二图标的第二图标显示位置的具体实施过程可以为：于至少两个第二图标触发叠加指令；响应叠加指令，对上述至少两个第二图标中的各个图标进行位置叠加处理，得到目标图标显示位置；将目标图标显示位置作为第二图标显示位置。Optionally, the number of second icons is at least two, and the specific implementation process for the mobile terminal to determine the second icon display position of the second icon may be: trigger an overlay instruction on at least two second icons; Each of the at least two second icons is subjected to position superposition processing to obtain a target icon display position; and the target icon display position is used as the second icon display position.

可选地，如果用户对多个第二图标进行了叠加操作，那么移动终端可以于上述多个第二图标触发叠加指令，该叠加操作可以指的是用户对多个第二图标的长按操作，也可以指的是用户对多个第二图标的滑动操作，本申请对叠加操作的具体实施方式不作限定。Optionally, if the user performs a superposition operation on multiple second icons, the mobile terminal may trigger a superimposition instruction on the multiple second icons, and the superposition operation may refer to the user's long press operation on the multiple second icons , may also refer to the user's sliding operation on a plurality of second icons, and the present application does not limit the specific implementation manner of the superposition operation.

上述目标图标显示位置可以是上述多个第二图标所在的图标显示位置中的任一图标显示位置，也可以是用户指定的图标显示位置，本申请对此不作限定。The target icon display position may be any one of the icon display positions where the plurality of second icons are located, or may be an icon display position specified by the user, which is not limited in the present application.

例如，图4g为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图4g所示，显示界面4110包括图标A、B以及C，如果用户对多个第二图标(即图标A和图标C)进行了叠加操作，那么移动终端可以于该多个第二图标触发叠加指令，并响应叠加指令，对多个第二图标中的各个图标进行叠加处理，得到目标图标显示位置。假设目标显示位置为图标A所在的图标显示位置，那么移动终端可以将图标A所在的图标显示位置作为第二图标显示位置。For example, FIG. 4g is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4g, the display interface 4110 includes icons A, B, and C. ) performs a superposition operation, then the mobile terminal can trigger a superposition instruction on the plurality of second icons, and in response to the superposition instruction, perform superposition processing on each of the plurality of second icons to obtain the display position of the target icon. Assuming that the target display position is the icon display position where the icon A is located, then the mobile terminal may use the icon display position where the icon A is located as the second icon display position.

可选地，第二图标为叠加模式显示的至少两个图标，移动终端可以根据叠加模式显示的至少两个图标得到目标图标显示位置，并将目标图标显示位置作为第二图标显示位置。可选地，移动终端可以将叠加模式显示的至少两个图标所在的图标显示位置作为目标图标显示位置。上述叠加模式可以指的是至少两个图标显示在同一图标显示位置上。Optionally, the second icon is at least two icons displayed in the superimposition mode, and the mobile terminal can obtain the target icon display position according to the at least two icons displayed in the superimposition mode, and use the target icon display position as the second icon display position. Optionally, the mobile terminal may use the icon display position where the at least two icons displayed in the overlay mode are located as the target icon display position. The above superimposed mode may refer to at least two icons being displayed on the same icon display position.

s12、根据第一图标显示位置以及第二图标显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置。s12. Determine an area display position of the target icon area according to the first icon display position and the second icon display position.

可选地，移动终端根据第一图标显示位置以及第二图标显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置的具体实施过程可以为：根据第一图标显示位置以及第二图标显示位置，确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，区域显示位置包含所第一图标显示位置以及第二图标显示位置。可以理解的是，移动终端可以根据第一图标显示位置以及第二图标显示位置，确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置的各个区域边界，并将上述各个区域边界首尾连接构成的显示位置作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置。Optionally, the specific implementation process for the mobile terminal to determine the area display position of the target icon area according to the first icon display position and the second icon display position may be: determine the target icon area according to the first icon display position and the second icon display position The area display position includes the first icon display position and the second icon display position. It can be understood that, according to the first icon display position and the second icon display position, the mobile terminal can determine each area boundary of the area display position of the target icon area, and use the display position formed by the end-to-end connection of the above-mentioned area boundaries as the target icon area The area of the display shows the location.

可选地，移动终端在确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置的各个区域边界时，可以将经过第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置的最左侧边框的直线作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置的一个区域边界，将经过第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置的最右侧边框的直线作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置的一个区域边界，将经过第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置的最上侧边框的直线作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置的一个区域边界，并将经过第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置的最下侧边框的直线作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置的一个区域边界。Optionally, when the mobile terminal determines the area boundaries of the area display positions of the target icon area, the straight line passing through the leftmost frame of the first icon display position and the second icon display position may be used as the area display position of the target icon area An area boundary of , the straight line passing through the rightmost borders of the first icon display position and the second icon display position is used as an area boundary of the area display position of the target icon area, and will pass through the first icon display position and the second icon display position The straight line of the uppermost border of the position is used as an area boundary of the area display position of the target icon area, and the straight line passing through the lowermost borders of the first icon display position and the second icon display position is taken as the area display position of the target icon area A region boundary.

例如，如图4f所示，以第一图标为图标B，第二图标为图标A为例，那么移动终端可以将经过第一图标显示位置的左侧边框的直线作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置的一个区域边界，将经过第二图标显示位置的右侧边框的直线作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置的一个区域边界，将经过第二图标显示位置的上侧边框的直线作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置的一个区域边界，并将经过第一图标显示位置的下侧边框的直线作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置的一个区域边界，从而将上述各个区域边界首尾连接构成的显示位置(即区域显示位置4101)作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置。For example, as shown in Figure 4f, taking the first icon as icon B and the second icon as icon A as an example, then the mobile terminal can use the straight line passing through the left border of the first icon display position as the area display position of the target icon area An area boundary of , the straight line passing through the right border of the second icon display position is taken as an area boundary of the area display position of the target icon area, and the straight line passing through the upper side border of the second icon display position is taken as the area of the target icon area An area boundary of the display position, and the straight line passing through the lower border of the first icon display position is used as an area boundary of the area display position of the target icon area, so that the display position formed by connecting the above-mentioned various area boundaries end to end (that is, the area display Position 4101) is the area display position of the target icon area.

可选地，移动终端根据第一图标显示位置以及第二图标显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置的具体实施过程可以为：确定图标显示位置的数量为预设尺寸所指示的图标子区域的数量的区域显示位置，并将确定的区域显示位置作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置，该确定的区域显示位置包括第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置。可以理解的是，移动终端可以将显示有第一图标和第二图标的区域显示位置作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置，目标图标区域的区域显示位置包含的图标显示位置的数量与目标图标区域的预设尺寸所指示的图标子区域的数量相同。Optionally, the specific implementation process for the mobile terminal to determine the area display position of the target icon area according to the first icon display position and the second icon display position may be: determine that the number of icon display positions is equal to the icon sub-area indicated by the preset size The number of area display positions is determined, and the determined area display position is used as the area display position of the target icon area, and the determined area display position includes a first icon display position and a second icon display position. It can be understood that, the mobile terminal may use the area display position where the first icon and the second icon are displayed as the area display position of the target icon area, and the number of icon display positions contained in the area display position of the target icon area is the same as the number of icon display positions of the target icon area. The number of icon sub-regions indicated by the preset size is the same.

例如，如图4f所示，以第一图标为图标B，第二图标为图标A为例，假设目标图标区域的预设尺寸为2*2，也就是说，移动终端可以确定图标显示位置的数量为4的区域显示位置，且确定的区域显示位置包括第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置，即确定的区域显示位置上显示有第一图标和第二图标。可以理解的是，移动终端可以将区域显示位置4101作为上述确定的区域显示位置，并将区域显示位置4101作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置。For example, as shown in Figure 4f, taking the first icon as icon B and the second icon as icon A as an example, assuming that the preset size of the target icon area is 2*2, that is to say, the mobile terminal can determine the size of the icon display position The number of area display positions is 4, and the determined area display positions include a first icon display position and a second icon display position, that is, the first icon and the second icon are displayed on the determined area display positions. It can be understood that the mobile terminal may use the area display position 4101 as the determined area display position, and use the area display position 4101 as the area display position of the target icon area.

可选地，若目标图标区域的预设尺寸为2*2，即目标显示区域为3*3的显示区域，那么移动终端确定图标显示位置的数量为预设尺寸所指示的图标子区域的数量的区域显示位置的方式可以包括以下三种：Optionally, if the preset size of the target icon area is 2*2, that is, the target display area is a 3*3 display area, then the mobile terminal determines that the number of icon display positions is the number of icon sub-areas indicated by the preset size There are three ways to display the location in the area of :

一、若第二图标位于目标显示区域的对角线上，即第一图标和第二图标成对角，显示有第一图标和第二图标的区域显示位置有且仅有一个，那么移动终端可以将显示有第一图标和第二图标的区域显示位置作为确定的区域显示位置。1. If the second icon is located on the diagonal of the target display area, that is, the first icon and the second icon are diagonal, and there is only one display position in the area where the first icon and the second icon are displayed, then the mobile terminal The area display position where the first icon and the second icon are displayed may be used as the determined area display position.

可选地，如图4f所示，以第一图标为图标B，第二图标为图标A为例，第二图标位于目标显示区域的对角线上，即第一图标和第二图标成对角，则图标显示位置的数量为4且显示有第一图标和第二图标的区域显示位置仅包括区域显示位置4101，那么移动终端可以将区域显示位置4101作为确定的区域显示位置，也就是说，移动终端可以将区域显示位置4101作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置。Optionally, as shown in Figure 4f, taking the first icon as icon B and the second icon as icon A as an example, the second icon is located on the diagonal of the target display area, that is, the first icon and the second icon are in pairs , then the number of icon display positions is 4 and the area display positions where the first icon and the second icon are displayed only include area display position 4101, then the mobile terminal can use area display position 4101 as the determined area display position, that is to say , the mobile terminal may use the area display position 4101 as the area display position of the target icon area.

二、若第二图标位于第一图标的垂直上方或垂直下方，显示有第一图标和第二图标的区域显示位置的数量2，那么移动终端可以确定显示有第一图标和第二图标的各个区域显示位置的横向优先级，并根据横向优先级和图标区域显示条件，确定图标显示位置的数量为预设尺寸所指示的图标子区域的数量的区域显示位置。2. If the second icon is located vertically above or below the first icon, and the number of display positions in the area where the first icon and the second icon are displayed is 2, then the mobile terminal can determine that each of the first icon and the second icon is displayed The horizontal priority of the area display position, and according to the horizontal priority and the icon area display condition, determine the area display position whose number of icon display positions is the number of icon sub-areas indicated by the preset size.

移动终端可以将区域显示位置中除第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置以外的图标显示位置作为候选图标显示位置。上述横向优先级可以指的是第三区域显示位置的优先级高于第四区域显示位置的优先级，其中第三区域显示位置可以指的是候选图标显示位置位于第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置左边的区域显示位置，第四区域显示位置可以指的是候选图标显示位置位于第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置右边的区域显示位置。上述横向优先级也可以指的是第四区域显示位置的优先级高于第三区域显示位置的优先级，本申请对横向优先级的具体内容不作限定。The mobile terminal may use icon display positions other than the first icon display position and the second icon display position in the area display positions as candidate icon display positions. The above-mentioned horizontal priority may refer to that the priority of the display position of the third area is higher than that of the display position of the fourth area, wherein the display position of the third area may refer to the fact that the candidate icon display position is located between the first icon display position and the second icon display position. The area display position to the left of the icon display position, the fourth area display position may refer to the area display position where the candidate icon display position is located to the right of the first icon display position and the second icon display position. The above horizontal priority may also mean that the priority of the display position of the fourth area is higher than the priority of the display position of the third area, and this application does not limit the specific content of the horizontal priority.

可选地，图4h为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图4h所示，以第一图标为图标B，第二图标为图标A为例，即第二图标位于第一图标的垂直上方。假设横向优先级指的是第三区域显示位置(即区域显示位置4121)的优先级高于第四区域显示位置(即区域显示位置4131)的优先级，其中第三区域显示位置中的候选图标显示位置(即图标E和图标D所在的图标显示位置)位于第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置的左边，第四区域显示位置中的候选图标显示位置(即图标显示位置4132和图标显示位置4133)位于第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置的右边，那么移动终端可以首先确定区域显示位置4121是否满足图标区域显示条件，若满足图标区域显示条件，则将区域显示位置4121作为确定的区域显示位置。假设图标区域显示条件指的是区域显示位置不包括除第一图标和第二图标以外的任一图标，由于区域显示位置4121还包含图标E和图标D，那么移动终端可以确定区域显示位置4121不满足图标区域显示条件。然后移动终端可以确定区域显示位置4131是否满足图标区域显示条件，由于区域显示位置4131不包括除第一图标和第二图标以外的任一图标，那么移动终端可以确定区域显示位置4131满足图标区域显示条件，并可以将区域显示位置4131作为确定的区域显示位置，从而将区域显示位置4131作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置。Optionally, FIG. 4h is a schematic diagram of another icon provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4h, taking the first icon as icon B and the second icon as icon A as an example, the second icon is located in the first Vertically above the icon. Assume that the horizontal priority means that the priority of the third area display position (ie, area display position 4121) is higher than the priority of the fourth area display position (ie, area display position 4131), wherein the candidate icon in the third area display position The display position (that is, the icon display position where icon E and icon D are located) is located on the left side of the first icon display position and the second icon display position, and the candidate icon display positions in the fourth area display position (ie, icon display position 4132 and icon display position Position 4133) is located on the right side of the first icon display position and the second icon display position, then the mobile terminal can first determine whether the area display position 4121 satisfies the icon area display condition, and if the icon area display condition is satisfied, then the area display position 4121 is used as the determination The area of the display shows the location. Assuming that the icon area display condition refers to that the area display position does not include any icons other than the first icon and the second icon, since the area display position 4121 also includes icons E and D, the mobile terminal can determine that the area display position 4121 does not The icon area display condition is met. Then the mobile terminal can determine whether the area display position 4131 meets the icon area display condition. Since the area display position 4131 does not include any icon except the first icon and the second icon, the mobile terminal can determine that the area display position 4131 meets the icon area display condition. conditions, and the area display position 4131 can be used as the determined area display position, so that the area display position 4131 can be used as the area display position of the target icon area.

三、若第二图标位于第一图标的横向左方或横向右方，显示有第一图标和第二图标的区域显示位置的数量2，那么移动终端可以确定显示有第一图标和第二图标的各个区域显示位置的垂直优先级，并根据垂直优先级和图标区域显示条件，确定图标显示位置的数量为预设尺寸所指示的图标子区域的数量的区域显示位置。3. If the second icon is located on the horizontal left or horizontal right of the first icon, and the number of display positions in the area where the first icon and the second icon are displayed is 2, then the mobile terminal can determine that the first icon and the second icon are displayed The vertical priority of each area display position of each area, and according to the vertical priority and icon area display conditions, determine the area display positions whose number of icon display positions is the number of icon sub-areas indicated by the preset size.

上述垂直优先级可以指的是第五区域显示位置的优先级高于第六区域显示位置的优先级，其中第五区域显示位置可以指的是候选图标显示位置位于第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置下边的区域显示位置，第六区域显示位置可以指的是候选图标显示位置位于第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置上边的区域显示位置。上述垂直优先级也可以指的是第六区域显示位置的优先级高于第五区域显示位置的优先级，本申请对垂直优先级的具体内容不作限定。The above vertical priority may mean that the priority of the display position of the fifth area is higher than that of the display position of the sixth area, wherein the display position of the fifth area may refer to the fact that the candidate icon display position is located between the first icon display position and the second icon display position. The area display position below the icon display position, the sixth area display position may refer to the area display position where the candidate icon display position is above the first icon display position and the second icon display position. The above vertical priority may also mean that the priority of the display position of the sixth area is higher than the priority of the display position of the fifth area, and the specific content of the vertical priority is not limited in this application.

可选地，图4i为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图4i所示，以第一图标为图标B，第二图标为图标A为例，即第二图标位于第一图标的横向左方，假设垂直优先级指的是第五区域显示位置(即区域显示位置4141)的优先级高于第六区域显示位置(即区域显示位置4151)的优先级，其中第五区域显示位置中的候选图标显示位置(即图标显示位置4142和图标显示位置4143)位于第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置的下边，第六区域显示位置中的候选图标显示位置(即图标显示位置4152和图标显示位置4153)位于第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置的上边，那么移动终端可以首先确定区域显示位置4141是否满足图标区域显示条件，若满足图标区域显示条件，则将区域显示位置4141作为确定的区域显示位置。假设图标区域显示条件指的是区域显示位置不包括除第一图标和第二图标以外的任一图标，由于区域显示位置4141还包含图标F，那么移动终端可以确定区域显示位置4141不满足图标区域显示条件。然后移动终端可以确定区域显示位置4151是否满足图标区域显示条件，由于区域显示位置4151不包括除第一图标和第二图标以外的任一图标，那么移动终端可以确定区域显示位置4151满足图标区域显示条件，并可以将区域显示位置4151作为确定的区域显示位置，从而将区域显示位置4151作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置。Optionally, FIG. 4i is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4i, taking the first icon as icon B and the second icon as icon A as an example, the second icon is located in the first On the horizontal left side of the icon, it is assumed that the vertical priority means that the priority of the fifth area display position (that is, the area display position 4141) is higher than that of the sixth area display position (that is, the area display position 4151), where the fifth area The candidate icon display positions (i.e. icon display position 4142 and icon display position 4143) in the display positions are located below the first icon display position and the second icon display position, and the candidate icon display positions (i.e. icon display positions) in the sixth area display positions position 4152 and icon display position 4153) are located above the first icon display position and the second icon display position, then the mobile terminal can first determine whether the area display position 4141 satisfies the icon area display condition, and if the icon area display condition is satisfied, the area A display position 4141 is displayed as a determined area. Assuming that the icon area display condition refers to that the area display position does not include any icon other than the first icon and the second icon, since the area display position 4141 also contains the icon F, then the mobile terminal can determine that the area display position 4141 does not meet the icon area Display conditions. Then the mobile terminal can determine whether the area display position 4151 meets the icon area display condition. Since the area display position 4151 does not include any icon except the first icon and the second icon, the mobile terminal can determine that the area display position 4151 satisfies the icon area display condition. condition, and the area display position 4151 can be used as the determined area display position, so that the area display position 4151 can be used as the area display position of the target icon area.

可选地，若显示有第一图标和第二图标的区域显示位置均不满足图标区域显示条件，那么移动终端可以将显示屏幕中任一满足图标区域显示条件的区域显示位置作为确定的区域显示位置，该确定的区域显示位置可以包含第一图标显示位置或第二图标显示位置，也可以不包含第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置中的任一图标显示位置。Optionally, if neither the area display position where the first icon nor the second icon is displayed satisfies the icon area display condition, then the mobile terminal may use any area display position on the display screen that satisfies the icon area display condition as the determined area display The determined area display position may include the first icon display position or the second icon display position, or may not include any one of the first icon display position and the second icon display position.

通过本申请实施例，移动终端可以仅根据第一图标显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，也可以根据第一图标显示位置和第二图标显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，从而按照一定规律在显示屏幕中确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，便于用户对目标图标区域的快速查找。Through the embodiment of the present application, the mobile terminal can determine the area display position of the target icon area only according to the first icon display position, or can determine the area display position of the target icon area according to the first icon display position and the second icon display position, so as to The area display position of the target icon area is determined on the display screen according to a certain rule, which is convenient for the user to quickly search for the target icon area.

可选地，本申请实施例还提出了另一种图标区域的管理方法，该方法可以应用于移动终端或者固定终端等智能终端，为了便于阐述，本申请实施例以执行主体为移动终端为例进行说明。可选地，本实施例示出的图标区域的管理方法包括：当区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标数量小于或等于当前终端界面中预设图标显示位置的数量时，将显示在区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标移动至当前终端界面中非区域显示位置的预设图标显示位置；当区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标数量大于当前终端界面中预设图标显示位置数量，将区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标中超过当前终端界面预设图标显示位置数量的部分的图标放置于目标终端界面。进一步的，本实施例示出的图标区域的管理方法具体包括步骤s1-s3：Optionally, the embodiment of the present application also proposes another method for managing the icon area, which can be applied to smart terminals such as mobile terminals or fixed terminals. For the convenience of illustration, the embodiment of the present application takes the mobile terminal as an example Be explained. Optionally, the icon area management method shown in this embodiment includes: when the number of icons in the area display position other than the first icon and/or the second icon is less than or equal to the preset icon display position in the current terminal interface When the number of icons displayed in the area display position, the icons other than the first icon and/or the second icon are moved to the preset icon display position of the non-area display position in the current terminal interface; when the icons in the area display position except The number of icons other than the first icon and/or the second icon is greater than the number of preset icon display positions in the current terminal interface, and the icons in the area display position other than the first icon and/or the second icon exceed the current terminal interface The icon of the part of the default icon displaying the number of locations is placed on the target terminal interface. Further, the icon area management method shown in this embodiment specifically includes steps s1-s3:

s1、确定目标数量，目标数量为当前终端界面中预设图标显示位置的数量。s1. Determine the number of targets, which is the number of preset icon display positions in the current terminal interface.

可选地，假设当前终端界面中的预设图标显示位置的数量为5，那么移动终端可以确定上述目标数量为5。Optionally, assuming that the number of preset icon display positions in the current terminal interface is five, then the mobile terminal may determine that the above target number is five.

s2、当区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标数量小于或等于目标数量时，将显示在区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标移动至当前终端界面中非区域显示位置的预设图标显示位置。s2. When the number of icons other than the first icon and/or the second icon in the icons at the area display position is less than or equal to the target number, it will be displayed in the icons at the area display position except the first icon and/or the second icon The icon of the icon is moved to the preset icon display position of the non-area display position in the current terminal interface.

可选地，假设区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标数量为2，且目标数量为5，那么移动终端可以将显示在区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标移动至当前终端界面中非区域显示位置的预设图标显示位置。Optionally, assuming that the number of icons other than the first icon and/or the second icon in the icons at the area display position is 2, and the target number is 5, the mobile terminal may divide the icons displayed at the area display position except the first icon and/or the second icon. The icon and/or icons other than the second icon are moved to a preset icon display position that is not a region display position in the current terminal interface.

s3、当区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标数量大于目标数量，将区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标中超过当前终端界面预设图标显示位置数量的部分的图标放置于目标终端界面。s3. When the number of icons in the area display position other than the first icon and/or the second icon is greater than the target number, the number of icons in the area display position other than the first icon and/or the second icon exceeds the current number. The icon of the terminal interface preset icon displaying the number of positions is placed on the target terminal interface.

可选地，上述目标终端界面可以是移动终端中最近生成的终端界面，也可以是移动终端中任一具有预设图标显示位置的终端界面，本申请对此不作限定。可选地，最近生成的终端界面可以指的是生成时间与当前***时间的差值小于预设生成时长的终端界面，该预设生成时长可以是移动终端设置的时间段，也可以是用户按照意愿设置的时间段。Optionally, the above-mentioned target terminal interface may be the most recently generated terminal interface in the mobile terminal, or any terminal interface in the mobile terminal with a preset icon display position, which is not limited in the present application. Optionally, the most recently generated terminal interface may refer to a terminal interface whose difference between the generation time and the current system time is less than a preset generation time. The desired time period.

可选地，假设区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标数量为7，且目标数量为5，那么移动终端可以将区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标中超过当前终端界面预设图标显示位置数量的部分的图标放置于目标终端界面，即移动终端可以将区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标中的任意两个图标放置于目标终端界面。Optionally, assuming that the number of icons other than the first icon and/or the second icon in the icons of the area display position is 7, and the target number is 5, the mobile terminal may divide the icons of the area display position except for the first icon and/or the second icon. /or icons other than the second icon that exceed the number of preset icon display positions on the current terminal interface are placed on the target terminal interface, that is, the mobile terminal can remove the first icon and/or the second icon from the icons at the area display position Any two icons other than icons are placed on the target terminal interface.

通过本申请实施例，移动终端可以获取第一图标和第二图标，并在在确定的目标图标区域的区域显示位置生成目标图标区域，该区域显示位置上显示有第一图标和/或第二图标，从而将第一图标和第二图标显示或移动至目标图标区域中，便于用户对目标图标区域，以及显示或移动至目标图标区域的第一图标和第二图标的快速查找。Through the embodiment of the present application, the mobile terminal can obtain the first icon and the second icon, and generate the target icon area at the area display position of the determined target icon area, where the first icon and/or the second icon are displayed. icon, so that the first icon and the second icon are displayed or moved to the target icon area, which is convenient for the user to quickly find the target icon area and the first icon and the second icon displayed or moved to the target icon area.

请参见图5所示的实施例，图5为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标区域的管理方法的流程示意图，该方法可以应用于移动终端或者固定终端等智能终端，为了便于阐述，本申请实施例以执行主体为移动终端为例进行说明。可选地，本实施例示出的图标区域的管理方法包括：Please refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of another icon area management method provided by the embodiment of the present application. This method can be applied to smart terminals such as mobile terminals or fixed terminals. For the convenience of illustration, this The embodiment of the application is described by taking the execution subject as a mobile terminal as an example. Optionally, the management method of the icon area shown in this embodiment includes:

S501、获取第一目标图标区域和第二目标图标区域。S501. Acquire a first target icon area and a second target icon area.

可选地，第一目标图标区域可以是显示屏幕中的任一图标区域，且第二目标图标区域可以是显示屏幕中除第一目标图标区域以外的任一图标区域。Optionally, the first target icon area may be any icon area on the display screen, and the second target icon area may be any icon area on the display screen except the first target icon area.

可选地，移动终端可以于显示屏幕触发图标区域获取指令，响应图标区域获取指令，将图标区域获取指令所指示的一个图标区域作为第一目标图标区域，并将图标区域获取指令所指示的另一个图标区域作为第二目标图标区域。可选地，如果用户在显示屏幕执行了图标区域获取操作，那么移动终端可以于显示屏幕触发图标区域获取指令。Optionally, the mobile terminal may trigger an icon area acquisition instruction on the display screen, respond to the icon area acquisition instruction, use an icon area indicated by the icon area acquisition instruction as the first target icon area, and use another icon area indicated by the icon area acquisition instruction as the first target icon area. An icon area serves as the second target icon area. Optionally, if the user performs an icon area acquisition operation on the display screen, the mobile terminal may trigger an icon area acquisition instruction on the display screen.

可选地，上述图标区域获取操作可以指的是用户执行的图标区域移动操作，且该图标区域移动操作所指示的终点位置位于显示屏幕中的任一图标区域中，也可以指的是触控操作，本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the above icon area acquisition operation may refer to the icon area moving operation performed by the user, and the end position indicated by the icon area moving operation is located in any icon area on the display screen, or may refer to touch operation, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.

可选地，当图标区域获取操作为用户执行的图标区域移动操作时，用户可以对第二目标图标区域执行图标区域移动操作，且图标区域移动操作所指示的终点位置位于第一目标图标区域中。可选地，图6为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图6所示，用户可以对第二目标图标区域(即图标区域613)执行图标区域移动操作，且图标区域移动操作所指示的终点位置位于第一目标图标区域(即图标区域611)中，移动终端可以响应用户执行的图标区域移动操作，获取第一目标图标区域和第二目标图标区域。Optionally, when the icon area acquisition operation is an icon area moving operation performed by the user, the user may perform the icon area moving operation on the second target icon area, and the end position indicated by the icon area moving operation is located in the first target icon area . Optionally, FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another icon provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6 , the user can perform an icon area movement operation on the second target icon area (i.e. icon area 613), and the icon area moves The end position indicated by the operation is located in the first target icon area (ie icon area 611 ), and the mobile terminal may acquire the first target icon area and the second target icon area in response to the icon area moving operation performed by the user.

可选地，当图标区域获取操作为用户执行的触控操作时，用户可以对第一目标图标区和第二目标图标区域执行长按操作，以实现对第一目标图标区域和第二目标图标区域的触控操作，从而实现对第一目标图标区域和第二目标图标区域的图标区域获取操作。Optionally, when the icon area acquisition operation is a touch operation performed by the user, the user can perform a long press operation on the first target icon area and the second target icon area, so as to realize the operation of the first target icon area and the second target icon area The touch operation of the area, so as to realize the icon area acquisition operation of the first target icon area and the second target icon area.

S502、根据第一目标图标区域的第一目标图标区域显示位置确定第三目标图标区域的区域显示位置，第一目标图标区域和/或第二目标图标区域显示在区域显示位置。S502. Determine an area display position of a third target icon area according to the first target icon area display position of the first target icon area, where the first target icon area and/or the second target icon area are displayed at the area display position.

可选地，移动终端可以将包含第一目标图标区域显示位置的区域显示位置作为第三目标图标区域的区域显示位置，也可以将第一目标图标区域显示位置中的部分区域显示位置作为第三目标图标区域的区域显示位置，本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal may use the area display position including the display position of the first target icon area as the area display position of the third target icon area, or may use a partial area display position in the first target icon area display position as the third target icon area display position. The area display position of the target icon area is not limited in this application.

可选地，如图6所示，移动终端可以将第一目标图标区域显示位置(即区域显示位置612)作为第三目标图标区域的区域显示位置。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 6 , the mobile terminal may use the display position of the first target icon area (that is, the area display position 612 ) as the area display position of the third target icon area.

可选地，移动终端可以确定第二目标图标区域的第二目标图标区域显示位置；若第一目标图标区域显示位置以及第二目标图标区域显示位置不满足预设条件，触发执行根据第一目标图标区域的第一目标图标区域显示位置确定第三目标图标区域的区域显示位置；若满足预设条件，触发执行根据第一目标图标区域显示位置以及第二目标图标区域显示位置确定第三目标图标区域的区域显示位置。可选地，本申请实施例中的预设条件可以与上述实施例中的预设条件相同，也可以与上述实施例中的预设条件不同。可选地，本申请实施例中的预设尺寸可以与上述实施例中的预设尺寸相同，也可以与上述实施例中的预设尺寸不同。可选地，本申请实施例中的预设区域长度可以与上述实施例中的预设区域长度相同，也可以与上述实施例中的预设区域长度不同，等等。Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine the display position of the second target icon area of the second target icon area; if the display position of the first target icon area and the display position of the second target icon area do not meet the preset The display position of the first target icon area of the icon area determines the area display position of the third target icon area; if the preset condition is met, trigger execution to determine the third target icon according to the display position of the first target icon area and the display position of the second target icon area The area of the area shows the location. Optionally, the preset conditions in the embodiments of the present application may be the same as or different from the preset conditions in the foregoing embodiments. Optionally, the preset size in the embodiment of the present application may be the same as or different from the preset size in the above embodiment. Optionally, the length of the preset region in this embodiment of the present application may be the same as the length of the preset region in the above embodiment, or may be different from the length of the preset region in the above embodiment, and so on.

可选地，该预设条件可以指的是：第一目标图标区域显示位置和第二目标图标区域显示位置之间的距离与第三目标图标区域的预设尺寸相匹配，即第一目标图标区域显示位置和第二目标图标区域显示位置之间的距离小于或等于预设区域长度。Optionally, the preset condition may refer to: the distance between the display position of the first target icon area and the display position of the second target icon area matches the preset size of the third target icon area, that is, the first target icon The distance between the area display position and the second target icon area display position is less than or equal to the preset area length.

S503、将显示在区域显示位置的图标中除第一目标图标区域中图标和/或第二目标图标区域中图标以外的图标移动至非区域显示位置的预设图标显示位置。S503. Among the icons displayed at the area display position, the icons other than the icon in the first target icon area and/or the icon in the second target icon area are moved to a preset icon display position not at the area display position.

可选地，本申请实施例中的预设图标显示位置可以于图3所示的实施例中的预设图标显示位置相同，也可以与图3所示的实施例中的预设图标显示位置不同。Optionally, the preset icon display position in the embodiment of the present application may be the same as the preset icon display position in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , or may be the same as the preset icon display position in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 different.

S504、在区域显示位置生成第三目标图标区域，并将第一目标图标区域中图标和目标图标区域中图标显示或移动至第三目标图标区域中。S504. Generate a third target icon area at the area display position, and display or move the icons in the first target icon area and the icons in the target icon area to the third target icon area.

可选地，如图6所示，假设第三目标图标区域的区域显示位置为区域显示位置612，那么移动终端可以在区域显示位置612上生成第三目标图标区域，并将第一目标图标区域中的图标和第二目标图标区域中的图标显示或移动至第三目标图标区域中，即将图标A、B以及C显示或移动至第三目标图标区域中。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 6 , assuming that the area display position of the third target icon area is the area display position 612, then the mobile terminal may generate the third target icon area at the area display position 612, and place the first target icon area The icons in and the icons in the second target icon area are displayed or moved to the third target icon area, that is, the icons A, B and C are displayed or moved to the third target icon area.

通过本申请实施例，移动终端可以将根据第一目标图标区域显示位置确定第三目标图标区域的区域显示位置，也可以根据第一目标图标区域显示位置和第二目标图标区域显示位置确定第三目标图标区域的区域显示位置，便于用户对第三目标图标区域的查找。Through the embodiment of this application, the mobile terminal can determine the area display position of the third target icon area according to the display position of the first target icon area, or determine the third target icon area display position according to the first target icon area display position and the second target icon area display position. The area display position of the target icon area is convenient for the user to find the third target icon area.

请参见图7所示的实施例，图7为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标区域的管理方法的流程示意图，该方法可以应用于移动终端或者固定终端等智能终端，为了便于阐述，本申请实施例以执行主体为移动终端为例进行说明。可选地，本实施例示出的图标区域的管理方法包括：Please refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of another icon area management method provided by the embodiment of the present application. This method can be applied to smart terminals such as mobile terminals or fixed terminals. For the convenience of illustration, this The embodiment of the application is described by taking the execution subject as a mobile terminal as an example. Optionally, the management method of the icon area shown in this embodiment includes:

S701、获取第一图标和第二图标。S701. Acquire a first icon and a second icon.

可选地，本申请实施例中的第一图标和第二图标可以与图3所示的实施例中的第一图标和第二图标相同，也可以与图3所示的实施例中的第一图标和第二图标不同。Optionally, the first icon and the second icon in the embodiment of the present application may be the same as the first icon and the second icon in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , or may be the same as the first icon and the second icon in the embodiment shown in FIG. The first icon and the second icon are different.

同理，移动终端可以将显示屏幕中的任一图标作为第一图标，并可以将显示屏幕中除第一图标以外的任一图标作为第二图标。Similarly, the mobile terminal may use any icon on the display screen as the first icon, and may use any icon on the display screen other than the first icon as the second icon.

S702、确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，第一图标和/或第二图标显示在区域显示位置。S702. Determine an area display position of the target icon area, where the first icon and/or the second icon are displayed at the area display position.

可选地，本申请实施例中的目标图标区域可以与图3所示的实施例中的目标图标区域相同，也可以与图3所示的实施例中的目标图标区域不同。Optionally, the target icon area in the embodiment of the present application may be the same as the target icon area in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , or may be different from the target icon area in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .

可选地，移动终端可以根据第一图标的区域显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，也可以根据第一图标的区域显示位置和第二图标的区域显示位置确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，还可以将显示屏幕中的任一区域显示位置作为目标图标区域的区域显示位置，且该任一区域显示位置包含的图标显示位置的数量与目标图标区域的预设区域尺寸所指示的图标子区域的数量相同，本申请对目标图标区域的区域显示位置的具体确定方式不作限定。可选地，上述预设区域尺寸可以是2*2，也可以是3*3，本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine the area display position of the target icon area according to the area display position of the first icon, or determine the area display position of the target icon area according to the area display position of the first icon and the area display position of the second icon , any area display position in the display screen can also be used as the area display position of the target icon area, and the number of icon display positions contained in the any area display position is the same as the icon size indicated by the preset area size of the target icon area. The number of areas is the same, and the present application does not limit the specific manner of determining the area display position of the target icon area. Optionally, the aforementioned preset area size may be 2*2 or 3*3, which is not limited in this application.

可选地，若目标图标区域的空间信息不符合预设条件，则在目标桌面显示界面中确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，或将当前桌面显示界面中的至少一个图标移入目标桌面显示界面中，并在当前桌面显示界面中确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置；若目标图标区域的空间信息符合预设条件，则在当前桌面显示界面中确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置。可选地，目标图标区域的空间信息可以指的是目标图标区域的预设区域尺寸。Optionally, if the spatial information of the target icon area does not meet the preset conditions, then determine the area display position of the target icon area in the target desktop display interface, or move at least one icon in the current desktop display interface into the target desktop display interface , and determine the area display position of the target icon area in the current desktop display interface; if the spatial information of the target icon area meets the preset condition, then determine the area display position of the target icon area in the current desktop display interface. Optionally, the spatial information of the target icon area may refer to a preset area size of the target icon area.

可选地，本申请实施例的预设条件可以与图3所示的实施例中的预设条件相同，也可以与图3所示的实施例中的预设条件不同。Optionally, the preset conditions in this embodiment of the present application may be the same as those in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , or may be different from the preset conditions in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .

可选地，上述预设条件可以包含以下至少一种：目标图标区域所占空间小于或等于当前桌面显示界面空置空间；当前桌面显示界面的空置空间可完整放置目标图标区域。可选地，目标图标区域所占空间小于或等于当前桌面显示界面中空置空间可以指的是：目标图标区域的图标子区域的数量小于或等于当前桌面显示界面中的空置图标显示位置；当前桌面显示界面的空置空间可完整放置目标图标区域可以指的是：在不需移动当前桌面显示界面中任一图标的情况下，即存在足够的空间放置目标图标区域。Optionally, the aforementioned preset conditions may include at least one of the following: the space occupied by the target icon area is less than or equal to the vacant space of the current desktop display interface; the vacant space of the current desktop display interface can completely place the target icon area. Optionally, the space occupied by the target icon area is less than or equal to the empty space in the current desktop display interface may refer to: the number of icon sub-areas in the target icon area is less than or equal to the empty icon display position in the current desktop display interface; The fact that the empty space of the display interface can completely place the target icon area may refer to: there is enough space to place the target icon area without moving any icon in the current desktop display interface.

S703、在区域显示位置生成目标图标区域，并将第一图标和第二图标显示或移动至目标图标区域中。S703. Generate a target icon area at the area display position, and display or move the first icon and the second icon into the target icon area.

可选地，若第一图标和第二图标显示在目标图标区域的区域显示位置，那么移动终端可以直接将第一图标和第二图标显示在目标图标区域中，若第一图标和第二图标未显示在目标图标区域的区域显示位置，那么移动终端则需将第一图标和第二图标移动至目标图标区域中，从而将第一图标和第二图标显示在目标图标区域中。Optionally, if the first icon and the second icon are displayed in the area display position of the target icon area, then the mobile terminal can directly display the first icon and the second icon in the target icon area, if the first icon and the second icon If the area display position is not displayed in the target icon area, then the mobile terminal needs to move the first icon and the second icon to the target icon area, so as to display the first icon and the second icon in the target icon area.

通过本申请实施例，移动终端可以按照一定的规律确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，便于用户对目标图标区域，以及第一图标和第二图标的查找。Through the embodiment of the present application, the mobile terminal can determine the area display position of the target icon area according to a certain rule, which facilitates the user to search for the target icon area, as well as the first icon and the second icon.

请参见图8所示的实施例，图8为本申请实施例提供的一种界面显示方法的流程示意图，该方法可以应用于智能终端，故本申请实施例的执行主体可以是智能终端。可选地，本实施例示出的界面显示方法包括：Please refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 8. FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of an interface display method provided by the embodiment of the present application. This method can be applied to a smart terminal, so the execution subject of the embodiment of the present application may be a smart terminal. Optionally, the interface display method shown in this embodiment includes:

S801、获取智能终端的至少一图标。S801. Acquire at least one icon of the smart terminal.

智能终端可以包括至少一个图标区域，可选地，该至少一个图标区域中的各个图标区域可以指的是大文件夹或者应用卡片等。可以理解的是，智能终端中的图标区域包括至少两个图标子区域，且至少两个图标子区域中的任一图标子区域可以显示该图标区域中的任一图标。可选地，不同图标区域可以具有不同的区域标识，其中不同图标区域的区域标识可以是智能终端设置的，也可以是用户设置的。The smart terminal may include at least one icon area, and optionally, each icon area in the at least one icon area may refer to a large folder or an application card. It can be understood that the icon area in the smart terminal includes at least two icon sub-areas, and any icon sub-area in the at least two icon sub-areas can display any icon in the icon area. Optionally, different icon areas may have different area identifications, wherein the area identifications of different icon areas may be set by the smart terminal or by the user.

可选地，智能终端可以包括锁定图标区域，用户仅能对该锁定图标区域中的图标执行启动操作，以启动该启动操作所指示的图标对应的程序，如启动该图标对应的应用等。但是，用户不能对该锁定图标区域中的图标执行其他操作，例如移出或者卸载等操作。Optionally, the smart terminal may include a lock icon area, and the user can only perform a start operation on icons in the lock icon area to start a program corresponding to the icon indicated by the start operation, such as start an application corresponding to the icon. However, the user cannot perform other operations on the icons in the locked icon area, such as operations such as moving out or uninstalling.

可选地，若智能终端的至少一个图标完成安装和/或下载后，智能终端则可以将上述完成安装和/或下载的图标作为至少一图标。可以理解的是，当智能终端每完成安装和/或下载一个图标时，则将当前***时间下完成和/或下载的图标作为至少一图标中的一个图标。可选地，至少一图标中的各个图标均为最近安装和/或下载的图标。Optionally, if at least one icon of the smart terminal is installed and/or downloaded, the smart terminal may use the icon that has been installed and/or downloaded as at least one icon. It can be understood that when the smart terminal finishes installing and/or downloading an icon, the icon completed and/or downloaded at the current system time is used as one of the at least one icon. Optionally, each icon in the at least one icon is a recently installed and/or downloaded icon.

可选地，智能终端可以将最近安装和/或下载的图标作为上述至少一图标，也就是说，智能终端可以获取最近安装的图标和最近下载的图标，或者智能终端可以获取最近安装的图标，或者智能终端可以获取最近下载的图标。Optionally, the smart terminal may use the recently installed and/or downloaded icon as the above at least one icon, that is, the smart terminal may obtain the recently installed icon and the recently downloaded icon, or the smart terminal may obtain the recently installed icon, Or the smart terminal can obtain the recently downloaded icons.

可选地，最近安装的图标可以指的是最近安装的应用的图标，可选地，最近安装的图标可以指的是：安装时间与当前***时间之间的差值小于预设时长，且从安装时间开始经过预设时长的时间段内未被启动过的应用的图标。可选地，最近下载的图标可以指的是最近下载的应用的图标，可选地，最近下载的图标可以指的是：下载时间与当前***时间之间的差值小于预设时长，且从下载时间开始经过预设时长的时间段内未被启动过的应用的图标。Optionally, the recently installed icon may refer to an icon of a recently installed application. Optionally, the recently installed icon may refer to: the difference between the installation time and the current system time is less than a preset duration, and since Icons for apps that haven't been launched for a preset amount of time since the install time. Optionally, the most recently downloaded icon may refer to the icon of the most recently downloaded application. Optionally, the most recently downloaded icon may refer to: the difference between the download time and the current system time is less than a preset duration, and since Icons for apps that haven't been launched for a preset amount of time since the download time started.

上述预设时长可以是智能终端预先设置的时间段，也可以是用户按照用户意愿设置的时长，例如1小时(h)或者一天等。The aforementioned preset duration may be a preset time period of the smart terminal, or may be a duration set by the user according to the user's wishes, such as 1 hour (h) or a day.

可选地，智能终端在检测到针对应用进行安装操作时，可以将该应用的图标作为最近安装的图标。或者，智能终端在检测到用户对应用进行下载操作时，可以将该应用的图标作为最近下载的图标。或者，智能终端在检测到用户对应用进行安装和下载操作时，可以将该应用的图标作为最近安装和下载的图标。Optionally, when the smart terminal detects that an installation operation is performed on an application, the icon of the application may be used as a recently installed icon. Alternatively, when the smart terminal detects that the user performs a download operation on the application, the icon of the application may be used as the most recently downloaded icon. Or, when the smart terminal detects that the user installs and downloads the application, the icon of the application can be used as the icon of the latest installation and download.

S802、确定至少一图标所属的目标图标区域，其中，目标图标区域包括至少两个图标子区域。S802. Determine a target icon area to which at least one icon belongs, where the target icon area includes at least two icon sub-areas.

可选地，智能终端可以获取至少一图标所对应应用的应用属性信息，根据应用属性信息和图标区域的区域标识的对应关系，确定上述应用属性信息对应的区域标识所标识的图标区域，并将确定的图标区域作为至少一图标所属的目标图标区域。可选地，应用属性信息可以用于指示应用的应用类型，可选地，应用属性信息可以为应用类型或者应用名称等，例如“游戏”或者“社交”等，假设图标所对应应用的应用属性信息为“社交”，根据应用属性信息和图标区域的区域标识的对应关系，确定应用属性信息“社交”对应的区域标识为“社交”，那么智能终端可以确定该图标所属的目标图标区域为区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域，即图9a中的图标区域9112。Optionally, the smart terminal may acquire the application attribute information of the application corresponding to at least one icon, determine the icon area identified by the area identifier corresponding to the above application attribute information according to the correspondence between the application attribute information and the area identifier of the icon area, and set The determined icon area is used as a target icon area to which at least one icon belongs. Optionally, the application attribute information can be used to indicate the application type of the application. Optionally, the application attribute information can be the application type or application name, such as "game" or "social", etc., assuming the application attribute of the application corresponding to the icon The information is "social", and according to the correspondence between the application attribute information and the area identification of the icon area, it is determined that the area identification corresponding to the application attribute information "social" is "social", then the smart terminal can determine that the target icon area to which the icon belongs is an area The icon area identified by "social" is identified, that is, the icon area 9112 in FIG. 9a.

可选地，应用属性信息和图标区域的区域标识的对应关系可以是智能终端设置的，也可以是用户按照用户喜好设置的，具体不受本申请实施例的限制。Optionally, the corresponding relationship between the application attribute information and the area identifier of the icon area may be set by the smart terminal, or set by the user according to the user's preference, which is not limited by the embodiments of the present application.

可选地，在检测到针对至少一图标的滑动操作时，智能终端可以确定滑动操作所指示的滑动终点位置，并将该滑动终点位置所处的图标区域作为目标图标区域。可选地，滑动轨迹可以为用户从至少一图标的起始位置滑动到滑动终点位置的路线。例如，图9b为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图9b所示，假设显示界面916中的图标区域9161包括图标I，用户可以长按图标I，并将图标I拖拽至图标区域9162，智能终端在检测到用户对图标I的滑动操作时，可以将显示界面916中的滑动轨迹的滑动终点位置所处的图标区域作为图标I的目标图标区域(即图标区域9162)。又如，假设显示界面916中包括图标A，图标A位于显示界面中除图标区域以外的区域，用户可以长按图标A，并将图标A拖拽至图标区域9162，智能终端在检测到用户对图标A的滑动操作时，可以将显示界面916中的滑动轨迹的滑动终点位置所处的图标区域作为图标A的目标图标区域(即图标区域9162)。可选地，本申请实施例中的图标可以为显示界面中存在的任一图标，例如最近安装和/或下载的图标，或者显示界面中除最近安装的图标以外的其他图标，或者显示界面中除最近下载的图标以外的其他图标，或者显示界面中除最近安装的图标和最近下载的图标以外的其他图标等。Optionally, when a sliding operation on at least one icon is detected, the smart terminal may determine the sliding end position indicated by the sliding operation, and use the icon area where the sliding end position is located as the target icon area. Optionally, the slide track may be a route along which the user slides from a start position of at least one icon to a slide end position. For example, FIG. 9b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 9b, assuming that the icon area 9161 in the display interface 916 includes the icon I, the user can press and hold the icon I and drag the icon I To the icon area 9162, when the smart terminal detects the user's sliding operation on the icon 1, the icon area where the sliding end position of the sliding track in the display interface 916 is located can be used as the target icon area of the icon 1 (ie, the icon area 9162) . As another example, assume that the display interface 916 includes an icon A, and the icon A is located in an area other than the icon area of the display interface, the user can press and hold the icon A, and drag the icon A to the icon area 9162, the smart terminal detects that the user During the sliding operation of the icon A, the icon area where the end point of the sliding track in the display interface 916 is located may be used as the target icon area of the icon A (ie, the icon area 9162 ). Optionally, the icon in the embodiment of the present application may be any icon existing in the display interface, such as the icon of the latest installation and/or download, or other icons in the display interface except the icon recently installed, or the icon in the display interface Icons other than the recently downloaded icon, or icons other than the recently installed icon and the recently downloaded icon in the display interface, etc.

S803、将至少一图标显示在目标图标区域的第一图标子区域，其中，在目标图标区域中第一图标子区域与第二图标子区域按预设模式显示，第二图标子区域为目标图标区域中除第一图标子区域以外的图标子区域。S803. Display at least one icon in the first icon sub-area of the target icon area, wherein the first icon sub-area and the second icon sub-area are displayed in a preset mode in the target icon area, and the second icon sub-area is the target icon Icon sub-areas in the area other than the first icon sub-area.

可选地，上述第一图标子区域与第二图标子区域按预设模式显示可以指的是：将第一图标子区域显示在第二图标子区域之前，即第一图标子区域位于第二图标子区域之前；上述第一图标子区域与第二图标子区域按预设模式显示也可以指的是：将第一图标子区域显示在第二图标子区域之后，即第一图标子区域位于第二图标子区域之后；或第一图标子区域与第二图标子区域依用户自定义或***默认位置排列显示。Optionally, displaying the first icon sub-area and the second icon sub-area in a preset mode may refer to: displaying the first icon sub-area before the second icon sub-area, that is, the first icon sub-area is located in the second icon sub-area. Before the icon sub-area; displaying the above-mentioned first icon sub-area and the second icon sub-area in a preset mode may also refer to: displaying the first icon sub-area after the second icon sub-area, that is, the first icon sub-area is located After the second icon sub-area; or the first icon sub-area and the second icon sub-area are arranged and displayed according to user-defined or system default positions.

在智能终端确定至少一图标所属的目标图标区域之后，可以将至少一图标显示在目标图标区域的第一图标子区域。如图9a所示，图标区域9112可以包括四个图标子区域，分别为图标J、K、L以及M所处的图标子区域，可选地，图标J所处的图标子区域位于图标K所处的图标子区域之前，图标K所处的图标子区域位于图标L所处的图标子区域之前，图标L所处的图标子区域位于图标M所处的图标子区域之前。当用户安装和/或下载社交类应用时，智能终端可以获取该社交类应用的图标Q，然后智能终端将区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域确定为目标图标区域，进而将图标Q显示在目标图标区域的第一图标子区域中。以显示界面912为例，若目标图标区域中除图标Q以外的各个图标均为历史图标，那么第一图标子区域可以为目标图标区域中的第一个图标子区域，即显示界面912中图标Q所处的图标子区域，可选地，历史图标可以为从安装和/或下载时间开始经过预设时长的图标，或者从安装和/或下载时间开始经过预设时长的时间段内对应应用被启动过的图标。可选地，由于需要将图标Q显示在目标图标区域的第一图标子区域中，那么可以对原本显示在目标图标区域的各个图标子区域中的图标显示位置进行调整，例如智能终端可以将目标图标区域中的图标J、图标K和图标L依次往后移位，并显示在显示界面912中的区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域的第一图标子区域之后的各个图标子区域中，也就是说，图标J、图标K和图标L显示在显示界面912中的区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域的第二图标子区域中。另外，由于目标图标区域仅包括四个图标子区域，那么智能终端可以不在目标图标区域的图标子区域中显示图标M，而是将图标M显示在图标界面中，可选地，图标界面可以如图9c中的图标界面919所示，图标界面可以包括目标图标区域中的所有图标。After the smart terminal determines the target icon area to which the at least one icon belongs, the at least one icon may be displayed in the first icon sub-area of the target icon area. As shown in Figure 9a, the icon area 9112 may include four icon sub-areas, which are respectively the icon sub-areas where icons J, K, L, and M are located. Optionally, the icon sub-area where icon J is located is located where icon K is located. Before the icon subarea where icon K is located, the icon subarea where icon K is located is before the icon subarea where icon L is located, and the icon subarea where icon L is located is before the icon subarea where icon M is located. When a user installs and/or downloads a social application, the smart terminal can obtain the icon Q of the social application, and then the smart terminal determines the icon area identified by the area identifier "social" as the target icon area, and then displays the icon Q on the In the first icon subarea of the target icon area. Taking the display interface 912 as an example, if each icon in the target icon area except the icon Q is a historical icon, then the first icon sub-area can be the first icon sub-area in the target icon area, that is, the icon in the display interface 912 The icon sub-area where Q is located. Optionally, the history icon can be an icon whose preset duration has elapsed since the installation and/or download time, or a corresponding application within a time period of the preset duration since the installation and/or download time. The activated icon. Optionally, since the icon Q needs to be displayed in the first icon subarea of the target icon area, the display position of the icon originally displayed in each icon subarea of the target icon area can be adjusted, for example, the smart terminal can place the target Icon J, icon K, and icon L in the icon area are shifted backward in turn, and displayed in each icon sub-area after the first icon sub-area of the icon area identified by the area identifier "social" in the display interface 912, That is to say, icon J, icon K and icon L are displayed in the second icon sub-area of the icon area identified by the area identification "social" in the display interface 912 . In addition, since the target icon area only includes four icon sub-areas, the smart terminal may not display the icon M in the icon sub-area of the target icon area, but display the icon M in the icon interface. Optionally, the icon interface may be as follows As shown in the icon interface 919 in FIG. 9c, the icon interface may include all icons in the target icon area.

可选地，至少一图标可以包含至少两图标，智能终端可以按照至少两图标的安装和/或下载时间，将至少两图标依第三显示规则显示在目标图标区域的第一图标子区域中。可选地，智能终端的至少两图标的安装和/或下载时间可以是：智能终端的至少两图标所对应应用的安装和/或下载时间。Optionally, at least one icon may include at least two icons, and the smart terminal may display the at least two icons in the first icon subarea of the target icon area according to a third display rule according to the installation and/or download time of the at least two icons. Optionally, the installation and/or download time of the at least two icons on the smart terminal may be: the installation and/or download time of the applications corresponding to the at least two icons on the smart terminal.

可选地，上述第三显示规则可以指的是：第二图标所属的图标子区域位于第三图标所属的图标子区域之前，且第二图标的安装和/或下载时间晚于第三图标的安装和/或下载时间。如图9a所示，假设至少一图标的数量为1，也就是说，最近安装和/或下载的图标的数量为1，若最近安装和/或下载的图标为图标Q，那么智能终端可以将图标Q显示在显示界面912中区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域的第一图标子区域。假设至少一图标的数量为2，也就是说，最近安装和/或下载的图标的数量为2，若最近安装和/或下载的图标为图标Q和图标R，可选地，图标R的安装和/或下载时间晚于图标Q的安装和/或下载时间，那么智能终端可以将图标R和图标Q分别显示在显示界面913中区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域的第一图标子区域，且图标R所属的第一图标子区域位于图标Q所属的第一图标子区域之前。同理，假设智能终端的至少一图标的数量为4，也就是说，最近安装和/或下载的图标的数量为4，若最近安装和/或下载的图标为图标Q、R、S、以及T，其中图标R的安装和/或下载时间晚于图标Q的安装和/或下载时间，图标S的安装和/或下载时间晚于图标Q和图标R中任一图标的安装和/或下载时间，图标T的安装和/或下载时间晚于图标Q、R以及S中任一图标的安装和/或下载时间，那么智能终端可以将图标T、S、R以及Q分别显示在显示界面915中区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域的第一图标子区域。可选地，图标T所属的第一图标子区域位于图标S、R以及Q所属的第一图标子区域之前，图标S所属的第一图标子区域位于图标R和图标Q所属的第一图标子区域之前，图标R所属的第一图标子区域位于图标Q所属的第一图标子区域之前。Optionally, the above-mentioned third display rule may refer to: the icon subarea to which the second icon belongs is located before the icon subarea to which the third icon belongs, and the installation and/or download time of the second icon is later than that of the third icon. Installation and/or download time. As shown in Figure 9a, assuming that the number of at least one icon is 1, that is, the number of the most recently installed and/or downloaded icon is 1, if the most recently installed and/or downloaded icon is icon Q, then the smart terminal can use The icon Q is displayed in the first icon sub-area of the icon area identified by the area identifier "social" in the display interface 912 . Assuming that the number of at least one icon is 2, that is, the number of the most recently installed and/or downloaded icons is 2, if the most recently installed and/or downloaded icons are icon Q and icon R, optionally, the installation of icon R And/or the download time is later than the installation and/or download time of the icon Q, then the smart terminal can display the icon R and the icon Q respectively in the first icon sub-area of the icon area identified by the area identification "social" in the display interface 913 , and the first icon subarea to which the icon R belongs is located before the first icon subarea to which the icon Q belongs. Similarly, assuming that the number of at least one icon on the smart terminal is 4, that is to say, the number of the most recently installed and/or downloaded icons is 4, if the most recently installed and/or downloaded icons are icons Q, R, S, and T, wherein the installation and/or download time of icon R is later than the installation and/or download time of icon Q, and the installation and/or download time of icon S is later than the installation and/or download of any icon in icon Q and icon R Time, the installation and/or download time of icon T is later than the installation and/or download time of any icon in icons Q, R and S, then the smart terminal can display icons T, S, R and Q on the display interface 915 respectively The middle area identifies the first icon sub-area of the icon area identified by "social". Optionally, the first icon sub-area to which icon T belongs is located before the first icon sub-area to which icons S, R, and Q belong, and the first icon sub-area to which icon S belongs is located in the first icon sub-area to which icons R and Q belong. Before the area, the first icon sub-area to which the icon R belongs is located before the first icon sub-area to which the icon Q belongs.

可选地，上述第三显示规则也可以指的是：第二图标所属的图标子区域位于第三图标所属的图标子区域之后，且第二图标的安装和/或下载时间晚于第三图标的安装和/或下载时间。本申请对第三显示规则的具体内容不作限定。Optionally, the above-mentioned third display rule may also refer to: the icon sub-area to which the second icon belongs is behind the icon sub-area to which the third icon belongs, and the installation and/or download time of the second icon is later than that of the third icon installation and/or download times. The present application does not limit the specific content of the third display rule.

可选地，当至少一图标的数量为多个时，由于需要将至少一图标中的各个图标显示在目标图标区域的第一图标子区域中，智能终端可以对原本显示在目标图标区域的各个图标子区域中的图标显示位置进行调整，调整方式可以参见上述实施例中对图标显示位置的调整方式，本申请实施例不再赘述。Optionally, when the number of at least one icon is multiple, since each icon in the at least one icon needs to be displayed in the first icon sub-area of the target icon area, the smart terminal may display each icon originally displayed in the target icon area The display position of the icon in the icon sub-area is adjusted. For the adjustment method, refer to the method for adjusting the display position of the icon in the above-mentioned embodiments, and details will not be repeated in this embodiment of the present application.

可选地，智能终端还可获取智能终端的任一图标区域中至少一个历史图标所对应应用的应用参数；并依至少一个历史图标所对应应用的应用参数获取第一显示规则，按照第一显示规则对至少一个历史图标进行排序。Optionally, the smart terminal can also obtain the application parameters of the application corresponding to at least one historical icon in any icon area of the smart terminal; and obtain the first display rule according to the application parameters of the application corresponding to the at least one historical icon, according to the first The rule sorts at least one history icon.

可选地，历史图标可以为从安装和/或下载时间开始经过预设时长的应用图标，或者从安装和/或下载时间开始经过预设时长的时间段内对应应用被启动的应用图标。Optionally, the history icon may be an application icon whose preset duration has elapsed since the installation and/or download time, or an application icon whose corresponding application has been started within a preset time period since the installation and/or download time.

可选地，上述应用参数可以是历史图标对应应用的使用频率，智能终端可以通过图标对应应用的启动频率和使用时长等因素获取历史图标对应应用的使用频率，也就是说，智能终端可以通过历史图标对应应用的启动频率和使用时长等因素来获取历史图标所对应应用的应用参数。例如，智能终端根据历史图标对应应用的启动频率来获取历史图标所对应应用的应用参数时，可以将同一时间范围内各历史图标对应应用的启动次数作为历史图标所对应应用的应用参数。Optionally, the above-mentioned application parameters may be the frequency of use of the application corresponding to the historical icon, and the smart terminal may obtain the frequency of use of the application corresponding to the historical icon through factors such as the startup frequency and the duration of use of the application corresponding to the icon. The application parameters of the application corresponding to the historical icon are obtained by factors such as the startup frequency and usage duration of the application corresponding to the icon. For example, when the smart terminal acquires the application parameters of the applications corresponding to the historical icons according to the startup frequency of the applications corresponding to the historical icons, the number of startup times of the applications corresponding to the historical icons within the same time range may be used as the application parameters of the applications corresponding to the historical icons.

可选地，若到达更新周期或历史图标所对应应用发生更新，智能终端可以获取智能终端的任一图标区域中至少一个历史图标所对应应用的应用参数。可选地，该更新周期可以是用户或者智能终端设置的静态的更新周期，例如一天、三天或者一周等。可选地，更新周期也可以是用户或者智能终端设置的动态的更新周期，示例性的，可以按照智能终端预设的一天、三天、一周等时间段来动态获取的更新周期，例如，在当前更新周期为一天时，智能终端从上一次获取到历史图标所对应应用的应用参数的***时间开始经过一天的时间时，智能终端可以确定到达更新周期，进而可以获取在当前***时间下的历史图标所对应应用的应用参数。可选地，智能终端可以按照预设的时间段顺序获取下一次的更新周期，那么下一次的更新周期为三天，智能终端从上一次获取到历史图标所对应应用的应用参数的***时间开始经过三天的时间时，智能终端可以确定到达更新周期，进而可以获取在当前***时间下的历史图标所对应应用的应用参数。Optionally, if the update period is reached or the application corresponding to the history icon is updated, the smart terminal may acquire the application parameters of the application corresponding to at least one history icon in any icon area of the smart terminal. Optionally, the update cycle may be a static update cycle set by the user or the smart terminal, such as one day, three days, or one week. Optionally, the update cycle can also be a dynamic update cycle set by the user or the smart terminal. For example, the update cycle can be dynamically acquired according to the preset time period of one day, three days, one week, etc. of the smart terminal, for example, in When the current update period is one day, when the smart terminal has elapsed from the last time the system time of the application parameters corresponding to the history icon has been obtained, the smart terminal can determine that the update period has been reached, and then can obtain the history under the current system time The application parameters of the application corresponding to the icon. Optionally, the smart terminal can obtain the next update cycle according to the preset time period sequence, then the next update cycle is three days, and the smart terminal starts from the system time when the application parameter corresponding to the historical icon was obtained last time After three days, the smart terminal can determine that the update cycle has been reached, and then can obtain the application parameters of the application corresponding to the history icon under the current system time.

例如，图9d为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图9d所示，显示界面920中区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域的各个图标子区域包含图标J、K、L以及M四个图标，图标J、K、L以及M可以是历史图标，那么智能终端可以获取图标J、K、L以及M所对应应用的应用参数。可选地，在到达更新周期或历史图标所对应应用发生更新时，智能终端可以获取在当前***时间下的图标J、K、L以及M所对应应用的应用参数，并按照图标J、K、L以及M所对应应用的应用参数对图标J、K、L以及M进行排序，得到排序结果，那么智能终端可以按照排序结果将图标J、K、L以及M显示在显示界面921中区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域的各个图标子区域中。For example, FIG. 9d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 9d, each icon sub-area of the icon area identified by the area identifier "social" in the display interface 920 includes icons J, K, L and four icons of M, icons J, K, L and M may be historical icons, then the smart terminal may acquire application parameters of applications corresponding to icons J, K, L and M. Optionally, when the update cycle is reached or the application corresponding to the historical icon is updated, the smart terminal can obtain the application parameters of the application corresponding to the icons J, K, L and M at the current system time, and follow the icons J, K, The application parameters of the applications corresponding to L and M sort the icons J, K, L, and M to obtain the sorting results, then the smart terminal can display the icons J, K, L, and M on the display interface 921 according to the sorting results. In each icon sub-area of the icon area identified by "Social".

可选地，上述第一显示规则可以指的是：按照应用参数从大到小的顺序进行排序，也就是说，智能终端可以按照应用参数从大到小的顺序对至少一个历史图标进行排序，从而得到第一排序结果。Optionally, the above-mentioned first display rule may refer to: sorting according to the order of application parameters from large to small, that is, the smart terminal may sort at least one historical icon according to the order of application parameters from large to small, Thus, the first sorting result is obtained.

上述第一排序结果可以是智能终端按照应用参数从大到小的顺序将图标区域中的各个历史图标进行排序的结果，也就是说，该第一排序结果可以是智能终端按照常用顺序对图标区域中各个历史图标进行排序的结果，那么智能终端将根据用户的使用习惯，将用户常用的应用的图标排在用户不常用的应用的图标之前。例如，智能终端将历史图标所对应应用的启动频率作为应用参数时，将启动频率较大值对应的历史图标排在启动频率值较小的历史图标之前。例如，如图9d所示，显示界面920中区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域中的图标J所属的图标子区域位于图标K所属的图标子区域之前，那么图标J所对应应用的应用参数大于图标K所对应应用的应用参数。The above first sorting result may be the result of the smart terminal sorting the historical icons in the icon area in descending order of the application parameters, that is to say, the first sorting result may be the smart terminal sorting the icon areas according to the usual order According to the result of sorting each historical icon in the user, the smart terminal will rank the icons of the user's frequently used applications before the icons of the user's infrequently used applications according to the user's usage habits. For example, when the smart terminal uses the startup frequency of the application corresponding to the history icon as an application parameter, the history icon corresponding to a larger startup frequency is ranked before the history icon with a smaller startup frequency. For example, as shown in FIG. 9d, in the icon area identified by the area identifier "social" in the display interface 920, the icon sub-area to which icon J belongs is located before the icon sub-area to which icon K belongs, then the application parameters of the application corresponding to icon J It is larger than the application parameter of the application corresponding to the icon K.

该实施例可以分别对不同图标区域中包含的图标按照图标所对应应用的使用频率进行排序，从而实现在不同场景下提高对常用应用的图标的查找及常用应用的启动效率。In this embodiment, the icons contained in different icon areas can be sorted according to the frequency of use of the applications corresponding to the icons, so as to improve the efficiency of searching for icons of frequently used applications and starting the commonly used applications in different scenarios.

可选地，本申请实施例中的第一显示规则包含但不限定于上述方式，例如第一显示规则还可以指的是是：按照应用参数从小到大的顺序进行排序。Optionally, the first display rule in this embodiment of the present application includes but is not limited to the above manner. For example, the first display rule may also refer to sorting the application parameters in ascending order of application parameters.

可选地，智能终端可以按照第一排序结果，在至少一个历史图标中选取第一历史图标，并将各个第一历史图标显示在图标区域的各个图标子区域中，第一历史图标的数量为图标区域中图标子区域的数量。Optionally, the smart terminal may select a first historical icon from at least one historical icon according to the first sorting result, and display each first historical icon in each icon sub-area of the icon area, and the number of the first historical icons is The number of icon subareas in the icon area.

如图9d所示，显示界面920中区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域包含图标J、K、L、M以及P，总计5个历史图标。上述5个历史图标的第一排序结果为：图标J、K、L、M以及P，可选地，图标J排列在最前面，图标P排列在最后面，由于上述图标区域中图标子区域的数量为四个，那么智能终端可以将排列在前面的四个历史图标作为第一历史图标，即将图标J、K、L以及M作为第一历史图标。然后，智能终端可以按照第一排序结果依次将图标J、K、L以及M显示在显示界面920中区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域的各个图标子区域中，例如图标J排列在最前面，那么智能终端可以将图标J显示在区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域的第一个图标子区域中，图标M排列在最后面，那么智能终端可以将图标M显示在区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域的最后一个图标子区域中，可选地，第一个图标子区域位于最后一个图标子区域之前。As shown in FIG. 9 d , the icon area identified by the area identifier "social" in the display interface 920 includes icons J, K, L, M, and P, a total of 5 historical icons. The first sorting result of the above five historical icons is: icons J, K, L, M, and P. Optionally, icon J is arranged at the front, and icon P is arranged at the back. If the number is four, then the smart terminal can use the four historical icons arranged in front as the first historical icons, that is, the icons J, K, L and M as the first historical icons. Then, the smart terminal can sequentially display the icons J, K, L, and M in each icon sub-area of the icon area identified by the area identifier "social" in the display interface 920 according to the first sorting result, for example, the icon J is arranged at the front , then the smart terminal can display the icon J in the first icon sub-area of the icon area identified by the area identifier "Social", and the icon M is arranged at the last, then the smart terminal can display the icon M in the area identifier "Social" In the last icon sub-area of the identified icon area, optionally, the first icon sub-area is located before the last icon sub-area.

可选地，若检测到针对目标图标区域中的任一图标子区域的点击操作，智能终端可以启动显示在上述图标子区域的图标对应的应用，并显示该应用的应用界面，可选地，上述图标子区域可以为第一图标子区域或者第二图标子区域等。例如，如图9e所示，当检测到用户对显示界面922中区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域的第一图标子区域中图标Q的点击操作时，智能终端可以启动图标Q所对应的应用，然后在显示界面923中显示该应用的应用界面。该应用界面可以是该应用的预设应用界面，也可以是该应用在上一次退出时的应用界面。Optionally, if a click operation on any icon sub-area in the target icon area is detected, the smart terminal may start the application corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon sub-area, and display the application interface of the application. Optionally, The aforementioned icon sub-area may be the first icon sub-area or the second icon sub-area. For example, as shown in FIG. 9e, when the user's click operation on the icon Q in the first icon sub-area of the icon area identified by the area identifier "social" in the display interface 922 is detected, the smart terminal can start the icon Q corresponding to application, and then display the application interface of the application on the display interface 923. The application interface may be a preset application interface of the application, or an application interface of the application when the application was exited last time.

可选地，智能终端中的任一图标区域还可以包括预设子区域，在检测到针对图标区域的预设子区域的点击操作，智能终端可以显示图标区域所包含的至少一个图标。可选地，在检测到对图标区域所包含的任一图标的点击操作时，可以启动该图标对应的应用。示例性的，用户对图标区域的预设子区域的点击操作可以在任一时刻产生，例如在智能终端将至少一图标显示在目标图标区域的第一图标子区域之后，用户可以对目标图标区域的预设子区域进行点击操作，智能终端在检测到点击操作之后，可以显示目标图标区域所包含的至少一个图标。Optionally, any icon area in the smart terminal may further include a preset sub-area, and the smart terminal may display at least one icon contained in the icon area after detecting a click operation on the preset sub-area of the icon area. Optionally, when a click operation on any icon included in the icon area is detected, the application corresponding to the icon may be started. Exemplarily, the user's click operation on the preset sub-area of the icon area can be generated at any time, for example, after the smart terminal displays at least one icon in the first icon sub-area of the target icon area, the user can click on the target icon area. A click operation is performed on the preset sub-area, and after the smart terminal detects the click operation, it may display at least one icon included in the target icon area.

可选地，该预设子区域为图标区域中除各个图标子区域以外的任一区域。例如，如图9c所示，当检测到用户对显示界面918中区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域的预设子区域9181的点击操作时，在图标界面919中显示区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域中的所有图标。该图标区域中的所有图标可以按列表的形式进行显示，也可以矩阵的形式进行显示，本申请对图标区域中的所有图标的显示方式不作限制。可选地，智能终端可以按照各个图标所对应应用的应用参数来显示图标区域中的至少一个图标。Optionally, the preset sub-area is any area in the icon area except for each icon sub-area. For example, as shown in FIG. 9c, when the user's click operation on the preset sub-region 9181 of the icon region identified by the region identifier "Social" in the display interface 918 is detected, the icon interface 919 displays the icon region identified by the region identifier "Social". All icons in the identified icon area. All the icons in the icon area can be displayed in the form of a list or in the form of a matrix, and the present application does not limit the display mode of all the icons in the icon area. Optionally, the smart terminal may display at least one icon in the icon area according to the application parameters of the application corresponding to each icon.

可选地，在检测到针对显示在智能终端的任一图标区域的任一图标子区域的第一图标的隐藏操作时，智能终端可以对第一图标进行隐藏，和/或，对图标区域中除第一图标以外的图标依第二显示规则进行显示。可选地，上述第二显示规则可以指的是按照应用参数从大到小的顺序进行排序，也可以指的是按照安装和/或下载时间从晚到早的顺序进行排序，本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, when a hiding operation for the first icon displayed in any icon sub-area of any icon area of the smart terminal is detected, the smart terminal may hide the first icon, and/or, hide the first icon in the icon area Icons other than the first icon are displayed according to the second display rule. Optionally, the above-mentioned second display rule may refer to sorting according to the order of application parameters from large to small, or may refer to sorting according to the order of installation and/or download time from late to early. Not limited.

可选地，智能终端在对图标区域中除第一图标以外的图标依第二显示规则进行显示时，可以按照第二显示规则对图标区域中除第一图标以外的图标进行排序，得到第二排序结果，从而根据第二排序结果将图标区域所包含的图标子区域的数量总和的图标显示在图标区域的各个图标子区域中。例如，图9f为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图9f所示，在检测到用户对显示界面924中区域标识“工具”所标识的图标区域中的图标I的隐藏操作时，智能终端在显示界面925中区域标识“工具”所标识的图标区域中取消对图标I的显示，并按顺序将历史图标N显示在显示界面925中区域标识“工具”所标识的图标区域中的图标子区域中，也就是说，在图标I被隐藏后，智能终端可以将第二排序结果中排在图标I之后的图标N显示在图标子区域中。Optionally, when the smart terminal displays icons other than the first icon in the icon area according to the second display rule, it can sort the icons in the icon area other than the first icon according to the second display rule to obtain the second Sort the results, so that according to the second sorting result, the icons corresponding to the total number of icon sub-regions included in the icon region are displayed in each icon sub-region of the icon region. For example, FIG. 9f is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 9f , when the user’s hidden operation on the icon I in the icon area identified by the area identifier “tool” in the display interface 924 is detected , the smart terminal cancels the display of the icon I in the icon area identified by the area identification "tool" in the display interface 925, and displays the history icon N in the icon area identified by the area identification "tool" in the display interface 925 in order In the icon sub-area in , that is, after the icon I is hidden, the smart terminal may display the icon N that ranks after the icon I in the second sorting result in the icon sub-area.

可选地，若智能终端的至少一图标中的第四图标更新为历史图标，则智能终端可以获取更新后的历史图标所对应应用的应用参数，第四图标为至少一图标中的任一图标。然后，智能终端可以根据目标图标区域所包含的所有历史图标所对应应用的应用参数，对目标图标区域所包含的所有历史图标进行排序，得到第三排序结果，可选地，目标图标区域所包含的所有历史图标所对应应用的应用参数包括更新后的历史图标所对应应用的应用参数。接下来，智能终端可以按照第三排序结果，在目标图标区域包含的所有历史图标中选取第二历史图标，第二历史图标的数量为目标图标区域中第二图标子区域的数量，并将各个第二历史图标显示在目标图标区域的各个第二图标子区域中。如图9a所示，当显示界面915中区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域所包含的至少一图标中的第四图标更新为历史图标时，可选地，第四图标可以包含图标T、S、R以及Q，即图标T、S、R以及Q从安装和/或下载时间开始经过了预设时长，或对应应用从安装和/或下载时间开始经过预设时长的时间段内被启动时，智能终端可以按照所有历史图标所对应应用的应用参数的第三排序结果将各个第二历史图标显示在显示界面 916中区域标识“社交”所标识的第二图标子区域中。由于第四图标包含图标T、S、R以及Q，也就是说，至少一图标中的各个图标均更新为历史图标，那么智能终端可以按照所有历史图标所对应应用的应用参数的第三排序结果将各个第二历史图标显示在显示界面916中区域标识“社交”所标识的各个图标子区域中。例如，第三排序结果的前四个图标依次为图标J、R、Q以及S，那么第二历史图标包括图标J、R、Q以及S，则智能终端可以将图标J、R、Q以及S依次显示在显示界面916中区域标识“社交”所标识的各个图标子区域中。Optionally, if the fourth icon in the at least one icon of the smart terminal is updated to a history icon, the smart terminal can obtain the application parameters of the application corresponding to the updated history icon, and the fourth icon is any icon in the at least one icon . Then, the smart terminal can sort all the historical icons contained in the target icon area according to the application parameters of all the historical icons contained in the target icon area to obtain the third sorting result. Optionally, the target icon area contains The application parameters of the applications corresponding to all the history icons include the updated application parameters of the applications corresponding to the history icons. Next, the smart terminal can select the second historical icons from all the historical icons contained in the target icon area according to the third sorting result, the number of the second historical icons is the number of the second icon sub-areas in the target icon area, and each The second history icons are displayed in the respective second icon sub-areas of the target icon area. As shown in FIG. 9a, when the fourth icon in at least one icon included in the icon area identified by the area identifier "social" in the display interface 915 is updated to a history icon, optionally, the fourth icon may include an icon T, S, R, and Q, that is, icons T, S, R, and Q have passed a preset time period from the installation and/or download time, or the corresponding application has been launched within a time period from the installation and/or download time to a preset time period , the smart terminal may display each second history icon in the second icon sub-area identified by the area identifier "social" on the display interface 916 according to the third sorting result of the application parameters of the applications corresponding to all the history icons. Since the fourth icon includes icons T, S, R, and Q, that is to say, each icon in at least one icon is updated as a historical icon, then the smart terminal can use the third sorting result of the application parameters corresponding to all historical icons Each second history icon is displayed in each icon sub-area identified by the area identifier "social" in the display interface 916 . For example, if the first four icons of the third sorting result are icons J, R, Q, and S in turn, then the second historical icons include icons J, R, Q, and S, and the smart terminal can display the icons J, R, Q, and S It is sequentially displayed in each icon sub-area identified by the area identifier "social" on the display interface 916 .

可选地，若目标图标区域包含至少一个锁定图标，则将至少一图标显示在目标图标区域中除锁定图标所在的图标子区域以外的第一图标子区域中。可选地，若至少一个锁定图标中的第五图标所在的图标子区域为第一图标子区域中的任一图标子区域，智能终端可以将第五图标显示在目标图标子区域，并将至少一图标显示在目标图标区域中除第五图标所在的图标子区域以外的第一图标子区域中。例如，图9g为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图9g所示，图标M被锁定在显示界面927中区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域的第一图标子区域，其他历史图标按照应用参数的排序结果依次显示在显示界面927中社交区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域的第一图标子区域之后的各个图标子区域中。当至少一图标U被划分到区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域中，智能终端则将图标U显示在显示界面928中区域标识“社交”所标识的图标区域中除图标M所属的图标子区域以外的第一图标子区域中，并将历史图标按照应用参数的排序结果显示在显示界面928中图标M和图标U之后的各个图标子区域中。Optionally, if the target icon area contains at least one lock icon, then at least one icon is displayed in the first icon sub-area in the target icon area except the icon sub-area where the lock icon is located. Optionally, if the icon sub-area where the fifth icon of at least one locked icon is located is any icon sub-area in the first icon sub-area, the smart terminal may display the fifth icon in the target icon sub-area, and place at least An icon is displayed in the first icon sub-area except the icon sub-area where the fifth icon is located in the target icon area. For example, FIG. 9g is a schematic diagram of another icon provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 9g, the icon M is locked in the first icon sub-area of the icon area identified by the area identifier "social" in the display interface 927, Other history icons are sequentially displayed in each icon sub-area after the first icon sub-area of the icon area identified by the social area identifier "social" in the display interface 927 according to the sorting results of the application parameters. When at least one icon U is divided into the icon area identified by the area identification "social", the smart terminal will display the icon U in the icon area identified by the area identification "social" in the display interface 928, except for the icon sub-region to which the icon M belongs. In the first icon sub-area outside the area, historical icons are displayed in each icon sub-area after the icon M and the icon U in the display interface 928 according to the sorting results of the application parameters.

通过本申请实施例，实现了对智能终端的图标进行智能划分图标区域并按照排序顺序进行智能显示的功能，可以提高对智能终端的图标的查找及图标对应应用的启动的效率。并且，可以分别对不同图标区域中包含的图标按照图标所对应应用的使用频率进行排序，从而实现在不同场景下提高对常用应用的图标的查找及常用应用的启动效率。Through the embodiment of the present application, the function of intelligently dividing the icon area of the icon of the smart terminal and intelligently displaying it according to the sort order is realized, which can improve the efficiency of searching for the icon of the smart terminal and starting the application corresponding to the icon. In addition, the icons included in different icon areas can be sorted according to the frequency of use of the applications corresponding to the icons, so as to improve the efficiency of searching icons of commonly used applications and starting common applications in different scenarios.

请参见图10所示的实施例，图10为本申请实施例提供的一种图标的处理方法的流程示意图，该方法可以应用于移动终端或者固定终端等智能终端，为了便于阐述，本申请实施例以执行主体为移动终端为例进行说明。可选地，本实施例示出的图标的处理方法包括:Please refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of an icon processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application. This method can be applied to smart terminals such as mobile terminals or fixed terminals. An example is described by taking the execution subject as a mobile terminal as an example. Optionally, the icon processing method shown in this embodiment includes:

S1001、获取目标聚类信息。S1001. Obtain target clustering information.

聚类信息可以包括属性信息、标签信息以及连接设备等，那么移动终端可以从各个聚类信息中获取目标聚类信息。可选地，移动终端可以获取属性信息作为目标聚类信息，而属性信息可以为“游戏”、“工具”等信息，那么当获取到的属性信息为“游戏”时，移动终端可以将“游戏”作为目标聚类信息。可选地，移动终端可以获取标签信息作为目标聚类信息，可选地，标签信息可以是用户根据意愿设置的信息，可选地，用户可以将“喜欢”或“不喜欢”等信息设置为标签信息；标签信息也可以是移动终端根据图标所对应应用的应用参数而设置的信息，可选地，移动终端可以将“常用”或“不常用”等信息设置为标签信息，那么当获取到的标签信息为“喜欢”时，移动终端可以将“喜欢”作为目标聚类信息。可选地，移动终端可以将连接设备作为目标聚类信息，而连接设备可以包括手环、手表等，那么当获取到的连接设备为手环时，移动终端可以将手环作为目标聚类信息，可选地，当同一类型的连接设备的数量为多个时，不同的连接设备均为不同的聚类信息，可选地，移动终端的连接设备可以包括第一手环和第二手环，当获取到的连接设备为第一手环时，移动终端可以将第一手环作为目标聚类信息。The clustering information may include attribute information, label information, and connected devices, and so on, and the mobile terminal may acquire target clustering information from each clustering information. Optionally, the mobile terminal can obtain attribute information as target clustering information, and the attribute information can be information such as "game", "tool", etc., then when the acquired attribute information is "game", the mobile terminal can use "game ” as the target clustering information. Optionally, the mobile terminal may acquire tag information as the target clustering information. Optionally, the tag information may be information set by the user according to his will. Optionally, the user may set information such as "like" or "dislike" as Tag information; tag information can also be information set by the mobile terminal according to the application parameters of the application corresponding to the icon. Optionally, the mobile terminal can set information such as "commonly used" or "not commonly used" as tag information, then when the obtained When the tag information of is "like", the mobile terminal may use "like" as the target clustering information. Optionally, the mobile terminal may use the connected device as the target cluster information, and the connected device may include a bracelet, a watch, etc., then when the obtained connected device is a bracelet, the mobile terminal may use the bracelet as the target cluster information , optionally, when there are multiple connected devices of the same type, different connected devices have different clustering information. Optionally, the connected devices of the mobile terminal may include a first bracelet and a second bracelet , when the acquired connected device is the first wristband, the mobile terminal may use the first wristband as the target clustering information.

上述应用参数可以是图标所对应应用的使用频率或者使用时长等，可选地，移动终端可以通过预设时长内图标所对应应用的启动频率来确定使用频率，也可以通过预设时长内图标所对应应用的启动频率和使用时长等因素的综合计算来确定使用频率。可选地，移动终端根据图标所对应应用的启动频率来确定图标所对应应用的使用频率，且将使用频率作为图标所对应应用的应用参数时，可以将预设时长内图标所对应应用的启动次数作为图标所对应应用的应用参数，也就是说，移动终端可以将同一时间范围内图标所对应应用的启动次数作为图标所对应应用的应用参数。可选地，上述预设时长可以是移动终端预设的时间段，也可以是用户根据意愿设置的时间段，可选地，预设时长可以为一天或者一周等，本申请对此不作限定。The above-mentioned application parameters may be the frequency of use or the duration of use of the application corresponding to the icon. Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine the frequency of use according to the startup frequency of the application corresponding to the icon within the preset time period, or may determine the frequency of use according to the application corresponding to the icon within the preset time period. The usage frequency is determined by comprehensive calculation of factors such as the startup frequency and usage duration of the corresponding application. Optionally, the mobile terminal determines the usage frequency of the application corresponding to the icon according to the startup frequency of the application corresponding to the icon, and when the usage frequency is used as an application parameter of the application corresponding to the icon, the startup of the application corresponding to the icon within a preset time period can be The number of times is used as an application parameter of the application corresponding to the icon, that is, the mobile terminal may use the number of times of starting the application corresponding to the icon within the same time range as the application parameter of the application corresponding to the icon. Optionally, the preset duration may be a time period preset by the mobile terminal, or a time period set by the user according to wishes. Optionally, the preset duration may be one day or one week, which is not limited in the present application.

移动终端可以包括至少一个图标区域，可选地，该至少一个图标区域中的各个图标区域可以指的是大文件夹或者应用卡片等。可以理解的是，移动终端中的图标区域包括至少一个图标子区域，且至少一个图标子区域中的任一图标子区域可以显示该图标区域中的任一图标。可选地，不同图标区域可以具有不同的区域标识，其中不同图标区域的区域标识可以是移动终端设置的，也可以是用户设置的。The mobile terminal may include at least one icon area. Optionally, each icon area in the at least one icon area may refer to a large folder or an application card. It can be understood that the icon area in the mobile terminal includes at least one icon sub-area, and any icon sub-area in the at least one icon sub-area can display any icon in the icon area. Optionally, different icon areas may have different area identifications, wherein the area identifications of different icon areas may be set by the mobile terminal or by the user.

可选地，移动终端可以于目标图标触发第一聚类指令，然后响应该第一聚类指令，获取目标图标的聚类信息，并确定或生成目标图标区域，那么移动终端可以将目标图标的聚类信息作为目标聚类信息。可选地，如果用户对目标图标进行了第一聚类操作，那么移动终端于目标图标触发第一聚类指令，该目标图标可以指的是用户执行上述第一聚类操作所作用的图标。上述聚类信息可以包括属性信息、标签信息以及连接设备等，可选地，若移动终端获取到的目标图标的聚类信息为目标图标所对应应用的属性信息“游戏”，那么可以将“游戏”作为目标聚类信息。可选地，移动终端可以确定或生成目标图标区域，该目标图标区域与目标聚类信息相匹配，且目标图标区域包含至少两个图标子区域，其中移动终端确定或生成目标图标区域的具体方式可参见后文描述。Optionally, the mobile terminal can trigger the first clustering instruction on the target icon, and then respond to the first clustering instruction to obtain the clustering information of the target icon, and determine or generate the target icon area, then the mobile terminal can cluster the target icon The clustering information is used as the target clustering information. Optionally, if the user performs the first clustering operation on the target icon, then the mobile terminal triggers the first clustering instruction on the target icon, where the target icon may refer to the icon on which the user performs the first clustering operation. The above-mentioned clustering information may include attribute information, label information, and connected devices, etc. Optionally, if the clustering information of the target icon acquired by the mobile terminal is the attribute information "game" of the application corresponding to the target icon, then the "game" may be ” as the target clustering information. Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine or generate a target icon area, the target icon area matches the target clustering information, and the target icon area includes at least two icon sub-areas, wherein the specific method for the mobile terminal to determine or generate the target icon area See the description below.

上述第一聚类操作可以是用户对目标图标的长按操作，也可以是用户对目标图标的连续双击操作等，本申请实施例对此不作限定。The above-mentioned first clustering operation may be a user's long-press operation on the target icon, or a user's continuous double-click operation on the target icon, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.

可选地，图11a为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图11a所示，假设第一聚类操作可以是用户对目标图标的长按操作，当用户对图标G执行长按操作时，移动终端可以将图标G作为目标图标，并于目标图标(即图标G)触发第一聚类指令。接下来，移动终端可以获取目标图标(即图标G)的聚类信息，并将目标图标的聚类信息作为目标聚类信息。在响应第一聚类指令时，移动终端还可以确定或生成图标区域1112作为目标图标区域，图标区域1112的区域标识可以为“游戏”，且图标区域1112包含6个图标子区域。Optionally, FIG. 11a is a schematic diagram of another icon provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11a, it is assumed that the first clustering operation may be a user’s long-press operation on the target icon. When the user performs a long-press operation on the icon G When the operation is pressed, the mobile terminal can use the icon G as a target icon, and trigger the first clustering instruction on the target icon (ie icon G). Next, the mobile terminal may acquire the clustering information of the target icon (ie icon G), and use the clustering information of the target icon as the target clustering information. When responding to the first clustering instruction, the mobile terminal may also determine or generate an icon area 1112 as the target icon area, the area identifier of the icon area 1112 may be "game", and the icon area 1112 includes 6 icon sub-areas.

可选地，移动终端可以于目标图标和目标图标区域触发第二聚类指令，并响应该第二聚类指令，获取目标图标的聚类信息，从而将目标图标的聚类信息作为目标聚类信息。可选地，如果用户对目标图标和目标图标区域进行了第二聚类操作，那么移动终端可以于目标图标和目标图标区域触发第二聚类指令，该目标图标和目标图标区域可以指的是用户执行上述第二聚类操作所作用的图标和图标区域。上述第二聚类操作可以是用户对目标图标和目标图标区域的长按操作，也可以是用户对目标图标的第一图标滑动操作，该第一图标滑动操作所对应的滑动轨迹的终点位置位于目标图标区域中，本申请对第二聚类操作的具体实施方式不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal may trigger a second clustering instruction on the target icon and the target icon area, and obtain the clustering information of the target icon in response to the second clustering command, so as to use the clustering information of the target icon as the target clustering information. Optionally, if the user performs a second clustering operation on the target icon and the target icon area, then the mobile terminal may trigger the second clustering instruction on the target icon and the target icon area, and the target icon and the target icon area may refer to The icon and the icon area on which the user performs the above-mentioned second clustering operation. The above-mentioned second clustering operation may be the user's long press operation on the target icon and the target icon area, or the user's first icon sliding operation on the target icon, and the end position of the sliding track corresponding to the first icon sliding operation is located at In the target icon area, the present application does not limit the specific implementation manner of the second clustering operation.

可选地，图11b为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图11b所示，1113为移动终端的显示界面，显示界面1113可以包括两个图标区域，分别为图标区域1114和图标区域1115，可选地，图标区域1114包含6个图标子区域，图标区域1115包含4个图标子区域。不同图标区域的区域标识可以是移动终端在确定或生成图标区域时预先设置的，也可以是用户按照意愿设置的，可选地，图标区域1114的区域标识可以为“游戏”，图标区域1115的区域标识可以为“社交”。当用户对图标G和图标区域1114执行长按操作时，移动终端可以于目标图标(即图标G)和目标图标区域(即图标区域1114)触发第二聚类指令。接下来，移动终端可以响应该第二聚类指令，获取图标G的聚类信息，并将获取到的图标G的聚类信息作为目标聚类信息，也就是说，移动终端可以将获取到的目标图标的聚类信息作为目标聚类信息。Optionally, FIG. 11b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. The icon area 1115, optionally, the icon area 1114 includes 6 icon sub-areas, and the icon area 1115 includes 4 icon sub-areas. The area identifications of different icon areas can be preset when the mobile terminal determines or generates the icon area, or can be set by the user according to the wishes. Optionally, the area identification of the icon area 1114 can be "game", and the area identification of the icon area 1115 can be "game". The zone ID can be "Social". When the user performs a long press operation on the icon G and the icon area 1114 , the mobile terminal may trigger a second clustering instruction on the target icon (namely the icon G) and the target icon area (ie the icon area 1114 ). Next, the mobile terminal can respond to the second clustering instruction, acquire the clustering information of the icon G, and use the acquired clustering information of the icon G as the target clustering information, that is, the mobile terminal can use the acquired The clustering information of the target icon is used as the target clustering information.

可选地，图11c为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图11c所示，当用户对图标G执行第一图标滑动操作时，移动终端可以于目标图标(即图标G)和目标图标区域(即图标区域1118)触发第二聚类指令，可选地，第一图标滑动操作所指示的滑动轨迹的终点位置位于目标图标区域中，那么移动终端可以获取图标G的聚类信息，并将图标G的聚类信息作为目标聚类信息，也就是说，移动终端可以将获取到的目标图标的聚类信息作为目标聚类信息。Optionally, FIG. 11c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11c, when the user performs the first icon sliding operation on the icon G, the mobile terminal can click on the target icon (ie icon G) and the target icon area (i.e. icon area 1118) to trigger the second clustering instruction, optionally, the end position of the sliding track indicated by the first icon sliding operation is located in the target icon area, then the mobile terminal can obtain the clustering of the icon G information, and use the clustering information of the icon G as the target clustering information, that is, the mobile terminal may use the acquired clustering information of the target icon as the target clustering information.

可选地，移动终端在获取目标图标的聚类信息时，可以显示至少一个聚类方式，并于至少一个聚类方式触发聚类方式选择指令，从而按照聚类方式选择指令所指示的聚类方式获取目标图标的聚类信息。可选地，如果用户对至少一个聚类方式进行了聚类方式选择操作，那么移动终端可以对至少一个聚类方式触发聚类方式选择指令，该聚类方式选择指令所指示的聚类方式可以指的是上述聚类方式选择操作所选中的聚类方式。可选地，图11d为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图11d所示，以图标G作为目标图标为例，移动终端在获取图标G的聚类信息时，可以在显示界面1121的显示区域1122中显示至少一个聚类方式。当用户对显示在显示区域1122中的至少一个聚类方式执行聚类方式选择操作时，移动终端可以对至少一个聚类方式触发聚类方式选择指令，若聚类方式选择指令所指示的聚类方式为属性聚类方式，且图标G的属性信息为“游戏”，那么移动终端可以将“游戏”作为目标图标的聚类信息，从而将“游戏”作为目标聚类信息。Optionally, when acquiring the clustering information of the target icon, the mobile terminal may display at least one clustering mode, and trigger a clustering mode selection instruction in at least one clustering mode, so as to select the cluster indicated by the clustering mode selection instruction method to obtain the clustering information of the target icon. Optionally, if the user performs a clustering method selection operation on at least one clustering method, the mobile terminal may trigger a clustering method selection instruction for at least one clustering method, and the clustering method indicated by the clustering method selection instruction may be refers to the clustering method selected by the above clustering method selection operation. Optionally, FIG. 11d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11d, taking the icon G as the target icon as an example, when the mobile terminal obtains the clustering information of the icon G, it can display At least one clustering method is displayed in the display area 1122 of the interface 1121 . When the user performs a clustering method selection operation on at least one clustering method displayed in the display area 1122, the mobile terminal may trigger a clustering method selection instruction for at least one clustering method, if the clustering method indicated by the clustering method selection instruction If the method is the attribute clustering method, and the attribute information of the icon G is "game", then the mobile terminal may use "game" as the clustering information of the target icon, thereby using "game" as the target clustering information.

可选地，移动终端也可以按照全屏显示形态将至少一个聚类方式显示在显示界面中，本申请对至少一个聚类方式的显示形态或者显示区域不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal may also display at least one clustering method on the display interface in a full-screen display form, and this application does not limit the display form or display area of at least one clustering method.

上述至少一个聚类方式可以包括属性聚类方式、标签聚类方式以及连接设备聚类方式中的至少一种，可选地，属性聚类方式可以指的是根据图标所对应应用的属性信息来确定图标的聚类信息，可选地，目标图标所对应应用的属性信息为“游戏”时，移动终端按照属性聚类方式获取到的目标图标的聚类信息为“游戏”；标签聚类方式可以指的是根据图标所对应应用的标签信息来确定图标的聚类信息，可选地，目标图标所对应应用的标签信息为“喜欢”时，移动终端按照标签聚类方式获取到的目标图标的聚类信息为“喜欢”；连接设备聚类方式可以指的是根据与图标建立过连接的连接设备来确定图标的聚类信息，可选地，与目标图标建立过连接的连接设备为“手环”时，移动终端按照连接设备聚类方式获取到的目标图标的聚类信息为“手环”。The above at least one clustering method may include at least one of an attribute clustering method, a label clustering method, and a connected device clustering method. Optionally, the attribute clustering method may refer to Determine the clustering information of the icon. Optionally, when the attribute information of the application corresponding to the target icon is "game", the clustering information of the target icon obtained by the mobile terminal according to the attribute clustering method is "game"; It may refer to determining the clustering information of the icon according to the label information of the application corresponding to the icon. Optionally, when the label information of the application corresponding to the target icon is "like", the target icon obtained by the mobile terminal according to the label clustering method The clustering information of the icon is "Like"; the connected device clustering method may refer to determining the clustering information of the icon according to the connected device that has established a connection with the icon. Optionally, the connected device that has established a connection with the target icon is " When "bracelet" is selected, the clustering information of the target icon obtained by the mobile terminal according to the clustering method of connected devices is "bracelet".

可选地，聚类方式选择指令所指示的聚类方式为连接设备聚类方式，且与目标图标建立过连接的连接设备的数量为多个，那么移动终端可以确定目标图标与多个连接设备中各个连接设备的亲密度，并将与目标图标的亲密度最大的连接设备作为目标图标的聚类信息。该亲密度可以是目标图标与各个连接设备的连接次数或者连接时长等，也可以是根据目标图标与各个连接设备的连接次数以及连接时长等综合计算的结果。可选地，若与目标图标建立过连接的连接设备包含手环和手表，且目标图标手环的连接次数为8次，目标图标与手表的连接次数为6次，也就是说，与目标图标的亲密度最大的连接设备为手环，那么移动终端可以将手环作为目标图标的聚类信息。Optionally, the clustering mode indicated by the clustering mode selection instruction is the connected device clustering mode, and the number of connected devices that have established connections with the target icon is multiple, then the mobile terminal can determine that the target icon is connected to multiple connected devices. The intimacy of each connected device in , and the connected device with the highest intimacy with the target icon is used as the clustering information of the target icon. The intimacy may be the number of times or duration of connection between the target icon and each connected device, or may be a comprehensive calculation result based on the number of times and duration of connection between the target icon and each connected device. Optionally, if the connected devices that have established a connection with the target icon include bracelets and watches, and the number of connections to the target icon bracelet is 8 times, the number of connections between the target icon and the watch is 6 times. The connected device with the greatest intimacy is a wristband, then the mobile terminal can use the wristband as the clustering information of the target icon.

可选地，移动终端可以触发图标区域确定或生成指令，从而确定或生成目标图标区域，并将目标图标区域的第一区域标识作为目标聚类信息。可选地，如果用户执行了图标区域确定或生成操作，那么移动终端可以触发图标区域确定或生成指令，从而确定或生成目标图标区域，并将目标图标区域的第一区域标识作为目标聚类信息，其中第一区域标识可以为目标图标区域的区域标识。可选地，图11e为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图11e所示，当用户执行了图标区域确定或生成操作时，移动终端可以触发图标区确定或生成指令，从而在显示界面1126中确定或生成图标区域1127，图标区域1127的区域标识可以为“游戏”。移动终端可以将确定或生成的图标区域1127作为目标图标区域，并将区域标识“游戏”作为目标图标区域的第一区域标识，那么移动终端可以将区域标识“游戏”作为目标聚类信息。可选地，图标区域确定或生成操作可以是用户在移动终端的设置界面中执行的；图标区域确定或生成操作也可以是用户在界面编辑菜单中执行的，可选地，用户可以对显示屏幕的预留区域进行长按操作，移动终端响应用户执行的长按操作，显示界面编辑菜单，该界面编辑菜单可以包括确定或生成图标区域的选项，那么用户可以在界面编辑菜单中进行图标区域确定或生成操作。Optionally, the mobile terminal may trigger an icon area determination or generation instruction, so as to determine or generate the target icon area, and use the first area identifier of the target icon area as the target clustering information. Optionally, if the user performs an icon area determination or generation operation, the mobile terminal may trigger an icon area determination or generation instruction, thereby determining or generating the target icon area, and using the first area identifier of the target icon area as the target clustering information , wherein the first area identifier may be the area identifier of the target icon area. Optionally, FIG. 11e is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11e , when the user performs an icon area determination or generation operation, the mobile terminal may trigger an icon area determination or generation instruction, thereby An icon area 1127 is determined or generated on the display interface 1126, and the area identifier of the icon area 1127 may be "game". The mobile terminal may use the determined or generated icon area 1127 as the target icon area, and use the area identifier "game" as the first area identifier of the target icon area, then the mobile terminal may use the area identifier "game" as the target clustering information. Optionally, the icon area determination or generation operation can be performed by the user in the setting interface of the mobile terminal; the icon area determination or generation operation can also be performed by the user in the interface editing menu, and optionally, the user can modify the The reserved area is long-pressed, and the mobile terminal responds to the long-pressed operation performed by the user to display the interface editing menu. The interface editing menu can include the option of determining or generating the icon area, so the user can determine the icon area in the interface editing menu or generate operations.

可选地，移动终端可以触发图标区域确定或生成指令，并确定或生成目标图标区域，然后于目标图标区域触发第一聚类信息设置指令，从而根据第一聚类信息设置指令，获取目标聚类信息。可选地，如果用户进行了图标区域确定或生成操作，那么移动终端触发图标区域确定或生成指令，并确定或生成目标图标区域。在确定或生成目标图标区域之后，如果用户对目标图标区域进行了第一聚类信息设置操作，那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发第一聚类信息设置指令，从而根据第一聚类信息设置指令，获取目标聚类信息。Optionally, the mobile terminal may trigger an icon area determination or generation instruction, determine or generate a target icon area, and then trigger a first clustering information setting instruction in the target icon area, so as to obtain the target clustering information according to the first clustering information setting instruction. class information. Optionally, if the user performs an icon area determination or generation operation, the mobile terminal triggers an icon area determination or generation instruction, and determines or generates a target icon area. After the target icon area is determined or generated, if the user performs the first clustering information setting operation on the target icon area, then the mobile terminal can trigger the first clustering information setting instruction on the target icon area, so that according to the first clustering information setting command to get target clustering information.

可选地，图11f为本申请实施例提供的一种图标的示意图，如图11f所示，以图标区域1129作为确定或生成的目标图标区域为例，移动终端触发图标区域确定或生成指令，确定或生成图标区域1129后，当用户对图标区域1129执行第一聚类信息设置操作时，移动终端可以对目标图标区域(即图标区域1129)触发第一聚类信息设置指令，假设第一聚类信息设置指令所指示的聚类信息为“喜欢”，那么移动终端可以将该第一聚类信息设置指令所指示的聚类信息“喜欢”作为目标聚类信息。Optionally, FIG. 11f is a schematic diagram of an icon provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11f , taking the icon area 1129 as the determined or generated target icon area as an example, the mobile terminal triggers an icon area determination or generation instruction, After the icon area 1129 is determined or generated, when the user performs the first clustering information setting operation on the icon area 1129, the mobile terminal can trigger the first clustering information setting instruction on the target icon area (ie, the icon area 1129), assuming that the first clustering information If the cluster information indicated by the category information setting instruction is "like", then the mobile terminal may use the cluster information "like" indicated by the first cluster information setting instruction as the target cluster information.

可选地，移动终端可以显示聚类信息设置区域，然后于聚类信息设置区域对目标图标区域触发第一聚类信息设置指令。可选地，用户可以长按目标图标区域，移动终端响应用户的长按操作显示目标图标区域对应的区域编辑菜单，区域编辑菜单包括聚类信息设置选项，用户可以点击聚类信息设置选项，移动终端响应用户的点击操作显示聚类信息设置区域，从而用户在聚类信息设置区域对目标图标区域执行第一聚类信息设置操作，那么移动终端可以于聚类信息设置区域对目标图标区域触发第一聚类信息设置指令。又如，用户可以执行多点触控或者滑动等操作，移动终端响应用户的多点触控或者滑动等操作显示聚类信息设置区域，从而用户在聚类信息设置区域对目标图标区域执行第一聚类信息设置操作，那么移动终端可以于聚类信息设置区域对目标图标区域触发第一聚类信息设置指令。可选地，如图11f所示，以显示界面1128中的显示区域1130作为聚类信息设置区域为例，用户可以在聚类信息设置区域执行第一聚类信息设置操作。可选地，移动终端可以按照全屏显示形态对聚类信息设置区域进行显示。Optionally, the mobile terminal may display the clustering information setting area, and then trigger the first clustering information setting instruction on the target icon area in the clustering information setting area. Optionally, the user can press and hold the target icon area, and the mobile terminal responds to the user's long press operation to display the area editing menu corresponding to the target icon area. The area editing menu includes clustering information setting options. The user can click the clustering information setting option to move The terminal displays the clustering information setting area in response to the user's click operation, so that the user performs the first clustering information setting operation on the target icon area in the clustering information setting area, then the mobile terminal can trigger the second clustering information setting operation on the target icon area in the clustering information setting area. A clustering information setting instruction. For another example, the user can perform operations such as multi-touch or sliding, and the mobile terminal displays the clustering information setting area in response to the user's multi-touching or sliding operations, so that the user performs the first operation on the target icon area in the clustering information setting area. clustering information setting operation, then the mobile terminal can trigger the first clustering information setting instruction on the target icon area in the clustering information setting area. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 11f , taking the display area 1130 in the display interface 1128 as the clustering information setting area as an example, the user may perform the first clustering information setting operation in the clustering information setting area. Optionally, the mobile terminal can display the clustering information setting area in a full-screen display form.

可选地，移动终端可以触发第二聚类信息设置指令，从而根据第二聚类信息设置指令，获取目标聚类信息，并确定或生成目标图标区域。可选地，若用户进行了第二聚类信息设置操作，那么移动终端可以触发第二聚类信息设置指令，从而根据第二聚类信息设置指令，获取目标聚类信息，并确定或生成目标图标区域。可选地，用户可以在移动终端的设置界面执行第二聚类信息设置操作，也可以在通知栏执行第二聚类信息设置操作，本申请对第二聚类信息设置操作的具体实施方式不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal may trigger the second clustering information setting instruction, so as to acquire target clustering information and determine or generate the target icon area according to the second clustering information setting instruction. Optionally, if the user performs the second clustering information setting operation, the mobile terminal may trigger the second clustering information setting instruction, so as to obtain the target clustering information according to the second clustering information setting instruction, and determine or generate the target clustering information. icon area. Optionally, the user can perform the second clustering information setting operation on the setting interface of the mobile terminal, or perform the second clustering information setting operation on the notification bar. This application does not make any specific implementation of the second clustering information setting operation. limited.

可选地，移动终端可以确定目标图标区域的第二区域标识，并将目标图标区域的第二区域标识作为目标聚类信息。该第二区域标识可以是移动终端预设的区域标识，也可以是用户根据意愿设置的区域标识，本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine the second region identifier of the target icon region, and use the second region identifier of the target icon region as the target clustering information. The second area identifier may be an area identifier preset by the mobile terminal, or an area identifier set by the user according to the user's will, which is not limited in this application.

可选地，移动终端可以确定目标图标区域中的各个图标的聚类信息，然后获取同一聚类信息对应的图标的数量，并将数量最大的图标的聚类信息作为目标图标区域的第二区域标识。可选地，图11g为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图11g所示，以图标区域1134作为目标图标区域为例，目标图标区域包含图标J、图标K、图标L以及图标M，那么移动终端可以确定图标J、图标K、图标L以及图标M中的各个图标的聚类信息。假设图标J、图标K以及图标L的聚类信息均为“社交”，而图标M的聚类信息为“工具”，移动终端可以获取到聚类信息“社交”对应的图标的数量为3，且可以获取到聚类信息“工具”对应的图标的数量为1，那么移动终端可以将聚类信息“社交”作为目标图标区域的第二区域标识。Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine the clustering information of each icon in the target icon area, then obtain the number of icons corresponding to the same clustering information, and use the clustering information of the icon with the largest number as the second area of the target icon area logo. Optionally, FIG. 11g is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11g, taking the icon area 1134 as the target icon area as an example, the target icon area includes icon J, icon K, icon L and icon M, then the mobile terminal can determine the clustering information of icons in icon J, icon K, icon L, and icon M. Assuming that the clustering information of icon J, icon K, and icon L are all "social", and the clustering information of icon M is "tool", the number of icons corresponding to the clustering information "social" that can be obtained by the mobile terminal is 3, And it can be obtained that the number of icons corresponding to the clustering information "tool" is 1, then the mobile terminal can use the clustering information "social" as the second area identifier of the target icon area.

可选地，移动终端确定或生成目标图标区域的具体实施过程可包括步骤s21和s22：Optionally, the specific implementation process for the mobile terminal to determine or generate the target icon area may include steps s21 and s22:

s21、确定目标图标区域的尺寸。s21. Determine the size of the target icon area.

移动终端在确定或生成目标图标区域之前，可以确定目标图标区域的尺寸，该尺寸可以描述目标图标区域包含的图标子区域的数量，以及目标图标区域包含的图标子区域的分布方式。可选地，移动终端确定的目标图标区域的尺寸可以是3*2，也就是说，目标图标区域可以包含6个图标子区域，目标图标区域包含的图标子区域分布为3行，每行包含2个图标子区域，每个图标子区域的尺寸是预先设置的，且所有图标子区域的尺寸均相同。Before determining or generating the target icon area, the mobile terminal can determine the size of the target icon area, and the size can describe the number of icon sub-areas included in the target icon area and the distribution of the icon sub-areas included in the target icon area. Optionally, the size of the target icon area determined by the mobile terminal may be 3*2, that is, the target icon area may contain 6 icon sub-areas, and the icon sub-areas contained in the target icon area are distributed in 3 rows, and each row contains There are 2 icon sub-areas, the size of each icon sub-area is preset, and the size of all icon sub-areas is the same.

可选地，移动可以确定目标显示界面的预留区域的尺寸，并根据该预留区域的尺寸确定目标图标区域的尺寸，目标图标区域的尺寸小于或等于上述预留区域的尺寸。可选地，如图11e所示，以显示界面1123作为目标显示界面为例，显示界面1123可以包括两个预留区域，分别为预留区域1124和预留区域1125，且两个预留区域连通，其中预留区域1124的尺寸为2*2，预留区域1125的尺寸为1*4，也就是说，若以预留区域1124的尺寸在预留区域1124中确定或生成图标区域，则确定或生成的图标区域可以包括4个图标子区域，且图标子区域分布为2行，每行包含2个图标子区域；若以预留区域1125的尺寸在预留区域1125中确定或生成图标区域，则确定或生成的图标区域可以包含4个图标子区域，且图标子区域分布为1行，每行包含4个图标子区域。由于显示界面1123包含的两个预留区域连通，那么显示界面1123的预留区域可以包含的最大的图标区域的尺寸为3*2或者1*4，那么移动终端可以根据显示界面1123的预留区域的尺寸确定目标图标区域的尺寸为3*2，可选地，移动终端也可以根据显示界面1123的预留区域的尺寸确定目标图标区域的尺寸为2*2。Optionally, Mobile can determine the size of the reserved area of the target display interface, and determine the size of the target icon area according to the size of the reserved area, and the size of the target icon area is smaller than or equal to the size of the reserved area. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 11e, taking the display interface 1123 as the target display interface as an example, the display interface 1123 may include two reserved areas, namely a reserved area 1124 and a reserved area 1125, and the two reserved areas connected, wherein the size of the reserved area 1124 is 2*2, and the size of the reserved area 1125 is 1*4, that is, if the icon area is determined or generated in the reserved area 1124 with the size of the reserved area 1124, then The determined or generated icon area may include 4 icon sub-areas, and the icon sub-areas are distributed in 2 rows, and each row contains 2 icon sub-areas; if the icon is determined or generated in the reserved area 1125 with the size of the reserved area 1125 area, the determined or generated icon area may include 4 icon sub-areas, and the icon sub-areas are distributed in one row, and each row includes 4 icon sub-areas. Since the two reserved areas included in the display interface 1123 are connected, the size of the largest icon area that can be included in the reserved area of the display interface 1123 is 3*2 or 1*4, so the mobile terminal can The size of the area determines the size of the target icon area to be 3*2. Optionally, the mobile terminal may also determine the size of the target icon area to be 2*2 according to the size of the reserved area of the display interface 1123 .

可选地，移动终端可以确定目标显示界面的预留区域的尺寸，若目标图标区域的预设尺寸大于该预留区域的尺寸，移动终端则可以根据该预留区域的尺寸确定目标图标区域的尺寸，该目标图标区域的尺寸小于或等于预留区域的尺寸；若目标图标区域的预设尺寸小于或等于预留区域的尺寸，移动终端则可以确定目标图标区域的尺寸为预设尺寸。可选地，目标图标区域的预设尺寸可以是移动终端设置的尺寸，也可以是用户按照意愿设置的尺寸。可选地，如图11e所示，以显示界面1123作为目标显示界面为例，显示界面1123可以包括两个预留区域，分别为预留区域1124和预留区域1125，且两个预留区域连通，其中预留区域1124的尺寸为2*2，预留区域1125的尺寸为1*4，那么显示界面1123的预留区域可以包含的最大的图标区域的尺寸为3*2或者1*4。假设目标图标区域的预设尺寸为3*3，该预设尺寸大于预留区域的尺寸，那么移动终端可以根据预留区域的尺寸确定目标图标区域的尺寸为3*2；假设目标图标区域的预设尺寸为2*2，该预设尺寸小于预留区域的尺寸，那么移动终端可以将预设尺寸2*2作为目标图标区域的尺寸。Optionally, the mobile terminal can determine the size of the reserved area of the target display interface. If the preset size of the target icon area is larger than the size of the reserved area, the mobile terminal can determine the size of the target icon area according to the size of the reserved area. size, the size of the target icon area is smaller than or equal to the size of the reserved area; if the preset size of the target icon area is smaller than or equal to the size of the reserved area, the mobile terminal can determine that the size of the target icon area is the preset size. Optionally, the preset size of the target icon area may be a size set by the mobile terminal, or a size set by the user according to wishes. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 11e, taking the display interface 1123 as the target display interface as an example, the display interface 1123 may include two reserved areas, namely a reserved area 1124 and a reserved area 1125, and the two reserved areas connected, wherein the size of the reserved area 1124 is 2*2, and the size of the reserved area 1125 is 1*4, then the size of the largest icon area that can be contained in the reserved area of the display interface 1123 is 3*2 or 1*4 . Assuming that the preset size of the target icon area is 3*3, which is larger than the size of the reserved area, then the mobile terminal can determine the size of the target icon area to be 3*2 according to the size of the reserved area; The preset size is 2*2, and the preset size is smaller than the size of the reserved area, so the mobile terminal can use the preset size 2*2 as the size of the target icon area.

可选地，移动终端可以于目标显示界面触发尺寸设置指令，并根据该尺寸设置指令设置目标图标区域的尺寸。可选地，假设上述尺寸设置指令所指示的尺寸为2*2，那么移动终端可以将目标图标区域的尺寸设置为2*2。可选地，如果用户对目标显示界面的进行了尺寸设置操作，那么移动终端可以于目标显示界面触发尺寸设置指令。Optionally, the mobile terminal may trigger a size setting instruction on the target display interface, and set the size of the target icon area according to the size setting instruction. Optionally, assuming that the size indicated by the above size setting instruction is 2*2, then the mobile terminal may set the size of the target icon area to 2*2. Optionally, if the user performs a size setting operation on the target display interface, the mobile terminal may trigger a size setting instruction on the target display interface.

s22、按照目标图标区域的尺寸确定或生成目标图标区域。s22. Determine or generate the target icon area according to the size of the target icon area.

在确定目标图标区域的尺寸后，移动终端可以按照确定的目标图标区域的尺寸确定或生成目标图标区域。可选地，如图11e所示，移动终端确定的目标图标区域的尺寸为3*2，那么移动终端可以按照目标图标区域的尺寸3*2确定或生成目标图标区域，并将目标图标区域(即图标区域1127)显示在显示界面1126中。After determining the size of the target icon area, the mobile terminal may determine or generate the target icon area according to the determined size of the target icon area. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 11e, the size of the target icon area determined by the mobile terminal is 3*2, then the mobile terminal may determine or generate the target icon area according to the size of the target icon area 3*2, and set the target icon area ( That is, the icon area 1127) is displayed on the display interface 1126.

可选地，移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发尺寸调整指令，并根据尺寸调整指令调整目标图标区域的尺寸。可选地，如果用户对目标图标区域进行了尺寸调整操作，那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发尺寸调整指令。可选地，用户可以长按目标图标区域的边缘部分，移动终端响应长按操作使目标图标区域处于尺寸调整状态，此时，用户可以拉动目标图标区域的边缘部分以调整目标图标区域的尺寸，从而对目标图标区域执行尺寸调整操作，那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发尺寸调整指令。可选地，用户可以长按目标图标区域，移动终端响应长按操作显示目标图标区域的区域编辑菜单，该区域编辑菜单中包含尺寸设置选项，用户可以点击尺寸设置选项，移动终端响应用户的点击操作显示尺寸设置区域，用户可以在尺寸设置区域中执行尺寸调整操作，那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发尺寸调整指令。可选地，用户可以通过缩放手势对目标图标区域执行尺寸调整操作，那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发尺寸调整指令。Optionally, the mobile terminal may trigger a size adjustment command on the target icon area, and adjust the size of the target icon area according to the size adjustment command. Optionally, if the user performs a size adjustment operation on the target icon area, the mobile terminal may trigger a size adjustment instruction on the target icon area. Optionally, the user can press and hold the edge of the target icon area, and the mobile terminal responds to the long press operation to make the target icon area in a size adjustment state. At this time, the user can pull the edge of the target icon area to adjust the size of the target icon area. Therefore, if the size adjustment operation is performed on the target icon area, the mobile terminal can trigger a size adjustment command on the target icon area. Optionally, the user can long press the target icon area, and the mobile terminal responds to the long press operation to display the area editing menu of the target icon area. The area editing menu includes size setting options. The user can click on the size setting option, and the mobile terminal responds to the user's click The operation displays a size setting area, and the user can perform a size adjustment operation in the size setting area, and then the mobile terminal can trigger a size adjustment command in the target icon area. Optionally, the user can perform a size adjustment operation on the target icon area through a zoom gesture, and then the mobile terminal can trigger a size adjustment command on the target icon area.

可选地，图11h为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图11h所示，以图标区域1137作为目标图标区域为例，若用户对目标图标区域进行了尺寸调整操作，那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发尺寸调整指令，得到调整后的目标图标区域的尺寸，那么移动终端可以按照调整后的目标图标区域的尺寸将目标图标区域显示在显示界面1138中。如图11h所示，目标图标区域(即图标区域1137)的尺寸为3*2，假设对目标图标区域触发的尺寸调整指令所指示的尺寸为2*2，那么移动终端可以将目标图标区域的尺寸调整为2*2，并按照调整后的目标图标区域的尺寸将目标图标区域显示在显示界面1138中，从而得到尺寸调整后的目标图标区域(即图标区域1139)。Optionally, FIG. 11h is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11h , taking the icon area 1137 as the target icon area as an example, if the user performs a size adjustment operation on the target icon area, then The mobile terminal can trigger a size adjustment command on the target icon area to obtain the adjusted size of the target icon area, then the mobile terminal can display the target icon area on the display interface 1138 according to the adjusted size of the target icon area. As shown in Figure 11h, the size of the target icon area (i.e. icon area 1137) is 3*2, assuming that the size indicated by the size adjustment command triggered on the target icon area is 2*2, then the mobile terminal can set the size of the target icon area The size is adjusted to 2*2, and the target icon area is displayed on the display interface 1138 according to the adjusted size of the target icon area, so as to obtain the size-adjusted target icon area (ie, the icon area 1139 ).

S1002、根据目标聚类信息确定至少一个图标，至少一个图标中的聚类信息与目标聚类信息相同。S1002. Determine at least one icon according to the target cluster information, where the cluster information in the at least one icon is the same as the target cluster information.

在获取到目标聚类信息后，移动终端可以获取图标集中的各个图标的聚类信息，从而确定聚类信息为目标聚类信息的至少一个图标。可选地，图标集中的图标可以是位于显示屏幕的所有图标区域以外的图标，也可以是移动终端包含的所有图标，本申请对图标集包含的具体图标不作限定。After acquiring the target clustering information, the mobile terminal may acquire the clustering information of each icon in the icon set, so as to determine that the clustering information is at least one icon of the target clustering information. Optionally, the icons in the icon set may be icons located outside all icon areas of the display screen, or all icons included in the mobile terminal, and this application does not limit the specific icons included in the icon set.

可选地，如图11a所示，假设图标集包含图标A、B、C、D、E、F、G、H以及N，那么移动终端可以获取图标A、B、C、D、E、F、G、H以及N中的各个图标的聚类信息。假设目标聚类信息为“游戏”，且图标A、B以及C的聚类信息为“工具”，图标D、E、F、G、H以及N的聚类信息为“游戏”，那么移动终端可以根据目标聚类信息确定至少一个图标，该至少一个图标包括图标D、E、F、G、H以及N。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 11a, assuming that the icon set includes icons A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, and N, the mobile terminal can obtain icons A, B, C, D, E, and F , G, H and the clustering information of each icon in N. Suppose the target clustering information is "game", and the clustering information of icons A, B and C is "tool", and the clustering information of icons D, E, F, G, H and N is "game", then the mobile terminal At least one icon may be determined according to the target cluster information, and the at least one icon includes icons D, E, F, G, H, and N.

可选地，移动终端可以获取目标聚类信息对应的聚类方式，并按照目标聚类信息对应的聚类方式确定图标集中各个图标的聚类信息，从而在各个图标中确定聚类信息为目标聚类信息的至少一个图标。可选地，如图11e所示，移动终端可以将图标区域1127的区域标识“游戏”作为目标聚类信息，那么移动终端可以获取区域标识“游戏”对应的聚类方式。假设区域标识“游戏”对应的聚类方式为属性聚类方式，那么移动终端可以按照属性聚类方式确定图标集中各个图标的聚类信息，也就是说，移动终端可以将图标集中的各个图标所对应应用的属性信息作为图标的聚类信息，从而在图标集中的各个图标中确定聚类信息为目标聚类信息的至少一个图标。Optionally, the mobile terminal may obtain the clustering mode corresponding to the target clustering information, and determine the clustering information of each icon in the icon set according to the clustering mode corresponding to the target clustering information, so as to determine the clustering information in each icon as the target At least one icon for clustering information. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 11e , the mobile terminal may use the area identifier "game" in the icon area 1127 as the target clustering information, and then the mobile terminal may acquire the clustering mode corresponding to the area identifier "game". Assuming that the clustering method corresponding to the area identifier "game" is the attribute clustering method, then the mobile terminal can determine the clustering information of each icon in the icon set according to the attribute clustering method, that is, the mobile terminal can classify each icon in the icon set as The attribute information of the corresponding application is used as the clustering information of the icons, so that the clustering information is determined to be at least one icon of the target clustering information in each icon in the icon set.

S1003、将至少一个图标移动至目标图标区域中。S1003. Move at least one icon into the target icon area.

在确定聚类信息为目标聚类信息的至少一个图标后，移动终端可以将该至少一个图标移动至目标图标区域中。可选地，如图11a所示，假设移动终端根据目标聚类信息确定的至少一个图标包括图标D、E、F、G、H以及N，目标图标区域可以是图标区域1112，那么移动终端可以将图标D、E、F、G、H以及N移动至图标区域1112中，也就是说，移动终端可以将图标D、E、F、G、H以及N移动至目标图标区域中。After determining that the cluster information is at least one icon of the target cluster information, the mobile terminal may move the at least one icon into the target icon area. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 11a, assuming that at least one icon determined by the mobile terminal according to the target clustering information includes icons D, E, F, G, H, and N, and the target icon area may be the icon area 1112, then the mobile terminal may Move the icons D, E, F, G, H, and N into the icon area 1112 , that is, the mobile terminal can move the icons D, E, F, G, H, and N into the target icon area.

可选地，上述目标图标区域可以是移动终端最近确定或生成的图标区域(即确定或生成时间与当前***时间之间的时间间隔小于预设时长的图标区域)，可选地，移动终端触发上述图标区域确定或生成指令、触发上述第二聚类信息设置指令或者于目标图标触发上述第一聚类指令时，可以确定或生成目标图标区域，该目标图标区域即为最近确定或生成的图标区域；上述目标图标区域也可以是显示屏幕中的历史图标区域(即确定或生成时间与当前***时间之间的时间间隔大于或等于预设时长的图标区域)，可选地，移动终端可以对目标图标和目标图标区域触发上述第二聚类指令，该目标图标区域即为历史图标区域。Optionally, the aforementioned target icon area may be the icon area recently determined or generated by the mobile terminal (that is, the icon area whose time interval between the determined or generated time and the current system time is less than a preset duration). Optionally, the mobile terminal triggers When the above-mentioned icon area determination or generation instruction triggers the above-mentioned second clustering information setting instruction or when the target icon triggers the above-mentioned first clustering instruction, the target icon area can be determined or generated, and the target icon area is the most recently determined or generated icon area; the above-mentioned target icon area can also be the historical icon area in the display screen (that is, the icon area where the time interval between the determined or generated time and the current system time is greater than or equal to the preset duration), optionally, the mobile terminal can The target icon and the target icon area trigger the above-mentioned second clustering instruction, and the target icon area is the historical icon area.

可选地，移动终端可于目标图标区域中的图标触发图标选择指令，确定选中的图标；并于选中的图标触发图标位置更新指令，确定选中的图标在桌面显示界面中的第一图标显示位置；从而将选中的图标由目标图标区域移动至第一图标显示位置。Optionally, the mobile terminal can trigger an icon selection command on an icon in the target icon area to determine the selected icon; and trigger an icon position update command on the selected icon to determine the first icon display position of the selected icon on the desktop display interface ; Thus, the selected icon is moved from the target icon area to the first icon display position.

可选地，如果用户对目标图标区域中的图标进行了图标选择操作，那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域中的图标触发图标选择指令，从而确定选中的图标，也就是说，确定上述图标选择指令所选中的图标。可选地，图11i为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图11i所示，将区域标识“游戏”所标识的图标区域作为目标图标区域，区域标识“游戏”所标识的图标区域包括图标D、E、F、G、H以及N，假设图标选择指令所选中的图标包括图标H和N，那么移动终端可以确定选中的图标为图标H和N。Optionally, if the user performs an icon selection operation on the icons in the target icon area, then the mobile terminal can trigger an icon selection instruction on the icons in the target icon area to determine the selected icon, that is, to determine the icon selection instruction The selected icon. Optionally, FIG. 11i is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11i , the icon area identified by the area identifier "game" is used as the target icon area, and the area identified by the area identifier "game" The icon area includes icons D, E, F, G, H, and N. Assuming that the icons selected by the icon selection instruction include icons H and N, the mobile terminal can determine that the selected icons are icons H and N.

可选地，如果用户对选中的图标进行了图标位置更新操作，那么移动终端可以对选中的图标触发图标位置更新指令，并确定选中的图标在桌面显示界面中的第一图标显示位置，可选地，图标位置更新操作可以是用户对选中的图标的第二图标滑动操作，该第二图标滑动操作所对应的滑动轨迹的终点位置位于目标图标区域之外，可选地，图标位置更新操作也可以是用户对应用编辑菜单中移出选项的功能选择操作，本申请对图标位置更新操作的具体实施方式不作限定。Optionally, if the user performs an icon position update operation on the selected icon, the mobile terminal may trigger an icon position update command on the selected icon, and determine the first icon display position of the selected icon on the desktop display interface. Optional Specifically, the icon position updating operation may be a second icon sliding operation performed by the user on the selected icon, and the end position of the sliding track corresponding to the second icon sliding operation is located outside the target icon area. Optionally, the icon position updating operation is also It may be the user's function selection operation of the remove option in the application editing menu, and the application does not limit the specific implementation of the icon position updating operation.

可选地，移动终端可以确定桌面显示界面中预留图标显示位置，并将预留图标显示位置中数量为选中的图标的数量总和的图标显示位置作为选中的图标的第一图标显示位置。可选地，第一图标显示位置也可以是选中的图标在移动至目标图标区域之前，在桌面显示界面中所处的图标显示位置，本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine the reserved icon display positions in the desktop display interface, and use the icon display positions whose number is the sum of the number of selected icons in the reserved icon display positions as the first icon display positions of the selected icons. Optionally, the first icon display position may also be the icon display position of the selected icon in the desktop display interface before moving to the target icon area, which is not limited in the present application.

可选地，如图11i所示，如果用户对显示界面1140中区域标识“游戏”所标识的图标区域中的图标H以及N进行了图标位置更新操作，那么移动终端可以对选中的图标触发图标位置更新指令，并可以在桌面显示界面中确定图标H对应的第一图标显示位置为预留图标显示位置1141，以及图标N对应的第一图标显示位置为预留图标显示位置1142。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 11i, if the user updates the icon positions of the icons H and N in the icon area identified by the area identifier "game" in the display interface 1140, then the mobile terminal can trigger icon Position update instruction, and can determine the first icon display position corresponding to icon H as reserved icon display position 1141 and the first icon display position corresponding to icon N as reserved icon display position 1142 in the desktop display interface.

在确定选中的图标以及选中的图标在桌面显示界面中的第一图标显示位置之后，移动终端可以将选中的图标由目标图标区域移动至第一图标显示位置。可选地，如图11i所示，假设选中的图标为目标图标区域(即区域标识“游戏”所标识的图标区域)中的图标H和N，且选中的图标在桌面显示界面中的第一图标显示位置分别为预留图标显示位置1141以及预留图标显示位置1142，那么移动终端可以将图标H和N由目标图标区域移动至第一图标显示位置，也就是说，移动终端可以将图标H移动至预留图标显示位置1141，并将图标N移动至预留图标显示位置1142，从而将更新后的结果显示在显示界面1143中。After determining the selected icon and the first icon display position of the selected icon on the desktop display interface, the mobile terminal may move the selected icon from the target icon area to the first icon display position. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 11i , it is assumed that the selected icon is the icon H and N in the target icon area (that is, the icon area identified by the area identifier "game"), and the selected icon is the first icon in the desktop display interface. The icon display positions are the reserved icon display position 1141 and the reserved icon display position 1142 respectively, then the mobile terminal can move the icons H and N from the target icon area to the first icon display position, that is to say, the mobile terminal can move the icon H Move to the reserved icon display position 1141 , and move the icon N to the reserved icon display position 1142 , so that the updated result is displayed on the display interface 1143 .

可选地，移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发位置更新指令，并确定目标图标区域中的各个图标在桌面显示界面中的第二图标显示位置，从而将目标图标区域中的各个图标由目标图标区域移动至第二图标显示位置，可选地，上述第二图标显示位置可以是桌面显示界面中预留图标显示位置。可选地，如果用户对目标图标区域进行了位置更新操作，那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域触发位置更新指令，可选地，该位置更新操作可以是用户在移动终端的设置界面执行的操作，也可以是用户在目标图标区域的区域编辑菜单中执行的操作。可选地，图11j为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图11j所示，以区域标识“游戏”所标识的图标区域作为目标图标区域为例，目标图标区域包含图标D、E、F、G、H以及N，当用户对目标图标区域执行了位置更新操作时，移动终端可以对目标图标区域触发位置更新指令，从而将图标D、E、F、G、H以及N由目标图标区域移动至桌面显示界面中的第二图标显示位置，并将目标图标区域中的各个图标的位置更新结果显示在显示界面1145中。Optionally, the mobile terminal can trigger a position update instruction in the target icon area, and determine the second icon display position of each icon in the target icon area on the desktop display interface, so that each icon in the target icon area is replaced by the target icon area Moving to the second icon display position, optionally, the second icon display position may be a reserved icon display position in the desktop display interface. Optionally, if the user performs a position update operation on the target icon area, the mobile terminal may trigger a position update command on the target icon area. Optionally, the position update operation may be an operation performed by the user on the setting interface of the mobile terminal, It can also be an action performed by the user in the area edit menu of the target icon area. Optionally, FIG. 11j is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11j , the icon area identified by the area identifier "game" is taken as the target icon area as an example, and the target icon area includes the icon D , E, F, G, H, and N, when the user performs a position update operation on the target icon area, the mobile terminal can trigger a position update command on the target icon area, so that the icons D, E, F, G, H, and N The target icon area is moved to the second icon display position in the desktop display interface, and the position update results of each icon in the target icon area are displayed on the display interface 1145 .

通过本申请实施例，可以将聚类信息为目标聚类信息的图标移动至目标图标区域中，从而使用户方便快捷地将至少一个图标移动至目标图标区域中。并实现了对目标图标区域的尺寸的多样性，使用户按照意愿对目标图标区域的尺寸进行设置和调整，从而提高了用户黏度。另外，可以基于图标位置更新指令将目标图标区域中选中的图标移动至目标图标区域外，或者基于位置更新指令将目标图标区域中的各个图标移动至目标图标区域外，从而实现方便快捷地对目标图标区域中的图标的显示位置进行更新。Through the embodiment of the present application, the icon whose cluster information is the target cluster information can be moved to the target icon area, so that the user can conveniently and quickly move at least one icon to the target icon area. And realize the diversity of the size of the target icon area, so that users can set and adjust the size of the target icon area according to their wishes, thereby improving the user viscosity. In addition, the icon selected in the target icon area can be moved out of the target icon area based on the icon position update command, or each icon in the target icon area can be moved out of the target icon area based on the position update command, so as to achieve convenient and quick target icon The display positions of the icons in the icon area are updated.

请参见图12所示的实施例，图12为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的处理方法的流程示意图，该方法可以应用于移动终端或者固定终端等智能终端，为了便于阐述，本申请实施例以执行主体为移动终端为例进行说明。可选地，本实施例示出的图标的处理方法包括：Please refer to the embodiment shown in Figure 12. Figure 12 is a schematic flowchart of another icon processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application. This method can be applied to smart terminals such as mobile terminals or fixed terminals. For the convenience of explanation, this application The embodiment is described by taking the execution subject as a mobile terminal as an example. Optionally, the icon processing method shown in this embodiment includes:

S1201、于目标图标区域的目标图标子区域中显示的目标图标触发编辑指令。S1201. The target icon displayed in the target icon sub-area of the target icon area triggers an editing instruction.

移动终端可以包括至少一个图标区域，其中，该至少一个图标区域中的各个图标区域可以指的是大文件夹或者应用卡片等。可以理解的是，移动终端中的图标区域包括至少一个图标子区域，且至少一个图标子区域中的任一图标子区域可以显示该图标区域中的任一图标。可选地，不同图标区域可以具有不同的区域标识，其中不同图标区域的区域标识可以是移动终端设置的，也可以是用户设置的。The mobile terminal may include at least one icon area, where each icon area in the at least one icon area may refer to a large folder or an application card or the like. It can be understood that the icon area in the mobile terminal includes at least one icon sub-area, and any icon sub-area in the at least one icon sub-area can display any icon in the icon area. Optionally, different icon areas may have different area identifications, wherein the area identifications of different icon areas may be set by the mobile terminal or by the user.

可选地，移动终端可以包括锁定图标区域，用户仅能对该锁定图标区域中的图标执行启动操作，以启动该启动操作所指示的图标对应的程序，如启动该图标对应的应用等。但是，用户不能对该锁定图标区域中的图标执行其他操作，可选地移出或者卸载等操作。Optionally, the mobile terminal may include a lock icon area, and the user can only perform a start operation on icons in the lock icon area to start a program corresponding to the icon indicated by the start operation, such as start an application corresponding to the icon. However, the user cannot perform other operations on the icons in the locked icon area, such as operations such as removing or uninstalling.

可选地，移动终端可以将显示屏幕中的任一图标区域作为目标图标区域，也可以将显示屏幕中的任意多个图标区域作为目标图标区域，本申请对此不作限定。可选地，移动终端可以将目标图标区域中的至少一个图标作为目标图标，也就是说，目标图标的数量可以是一个或多个。可以理解的是，当目标图标区域的数量为多个时，移动终端可以在多个目标图标区域中确定至少一个图标作为目标图标。Optionally, the mobile terminal may use any icon area on the display screen as the target icon area, or any number of icon areas on the display screen as the target icon area, which is not limited in the present application. Optionally, the mobile terminal may use at least one icon in the target icon area as the target icon, that is, the number of target icons may be one or more. It can be understood that, when there are multiple target icon areas, the mobile terminal may determine at least one icon in the multiple target icon areas as the target icon.

可选地，如果用户对显示屏幕中的任意图标区域中的任意图标子区域中显示的图标进行了编辑操作，那么移动终端可以响应用户执行的编辑操作，并将编辑操作所作用的图标区域作为目标图标区域。可选地，上述编辑操作可以指的是长按操作，也可以指的是连续点击操作，本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, if the user performs an editing operation on an icon displayed in any icon sub-area in any icon area on the display screen, the mobile terminal may respond to the editing operation performed by the user, and use the icon area on which the editing operation acts as Target icon area. Optionally, the above editing operation may refer to a long press operation, or may refer to a continuous click operation, which is not limited in this application.

可选地，移动终端可以于至少一个图标区域触发触控指令，从而将触控指令所作用的至少一个图标作为目标图标区域；也可以于显示屏幕触发区域选择指令，从而将区域选择指令所选中的至少一个图标区域作为目标图标区域；还可以于显示屏幕触发轨迹生成指令，从而将轨迹生成指令所指示的轨迹所经过的至少一个图标区域作为目标图标区域，或者将轨迹生成指令所指示的轨迹形成的封闭区域中的至少一个图标区域作为目标图标区域。本申请对确定目标图标区域的具体方式不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal can trigger a touch command on at least one icon area, so as to use at least one icon on which the touch command acts as a target icon area; it can also trigger an area selection command on the display screen, so that the area selection command is selected At least one icon area of the track is used as the target icon area; the track generation command can also be triggered on the display screen, so that at least one icon area passed by the track indicated by the track generation command is used as the target icon area, or the track indicated by the track generation command At least one icon area in the formed enclosed area is used as the target icon area. The present application does not limit the specific manner of determining the target icon area.

可选地，移动终端可以于目标图标区域中的至少一个图标触发图标选择指令，并将图标选择指令所选中的图标作为目标图标；也可以于目标图标区域中的至少一个图标触发触控指令，并将触控指令所指示的图标作为目标图标，本申请对目标图标的具体确定方式不作限定。Optionally, the mobile terminal may trigger an icon selection instruction on at least one icon in the target icon area, and use the icon selected by the icon selection instruction as the target icon; it may also trigger a touch instruction on at least one icon in the target icon area, The icon indicated by the touch command is used as the target icon, and the present application does not limit the specific method of determining the target icon.

可选地，移动终端可以先确定目标图标区域，再从目标图标区域中确定目标图标，如用户可以长按至少一个图标区域，移动终端响应用户执行的长按操作，将长按操作所作用的至少一个图标区域作为目标图标区域，并显示目标图标区域中的所有图标，那么用户可以在显示的所有图标中选择至少一个图标作为目标图标；移动终端也可以直接确定目标图标，并将目标图标所处的至少一个图标区域作为目标图标区域，如用户可以长按至少一个图标，移动终端响应用户执行的长按操作，将长按操作所作用的至少一个图标作为目标图标，并将目标图标所处的至少一个图标区域作为目标图标区域。可选地，当移动终端直接确定目标图标时，目标图标可以包含显示屏幕中任意图标区域中的一个或多个图标，也可以包含移动终端的所有图标中除所有图标区域包含的所有图标以外的一个或多个图标。Optionally, the mobile terminal can first determine the target icon area, and then determine the target icon from the target icon area. For example, the user can long press at least one icon area, and the mobile terminal responds to the long press operation performed by the user, and will At least one icon area is used as the target icon area, and all icons in the target icon area are displayed, then the user can select at least one icon from all the displayed icons as the target icon; the mobile terminal can also directly determine the target icon, and display the target icon At least one icon area at the location is used as the target icon area. If the user can long press at least one icon, the mobile terminal responds to the long press operation performed by the user, and uses at least one icon on which the long press operation acts as the target icon, and sets the target icon where the target icon is located. At least one icon area of is used as the target icon area. Optionally, when the mobile terminal directly determines the target icon, the target icon may include one or more icons in any icon area on the display screen, or may include all icons of the mobile terminal except all icons contained in all icon areas. One or more icons.

可选地，上述目标图标子区域可以指的是目标图标区域中显示有图标的至少一个图标子区域，也可以指的是目标图标区域中显示有图标的所有图标子区域中的前M个图标子区域中的至少一个图标子区域，其中M为正整数，M大于零且小于目标图标区域的所有图标子区域的数量。举例来说，如果用户对目标图标区域中显示有图标的至少一个图标子区域中的图标进行了编辑操作，那么移动终端可以将上述至少一个图标子区域作为目标图标子区域，也就是说，移动终端可以将用户执行的编辑操作所作用的图标所在的图标子区域作为目标图标子区域。Optionally, the above-mentioned target icon sub-area may refer to at least one icon sub-area in which icons are displayed in the target icon area, or may refer to the top M icons in all icon sub-areas in which icons are displayed in the target icon area At least one icon sub-area in the sub-area, where M is a positive integer, and M is greater than zero and less than the number of all icon sub-areas of the target icon area. For example, if the user edits an icon in at least one icon subarea in which an icon is displayed in the target icon area, the mobile terminal may use the at least one icon subarea as the target icon subarea, that is, the mobile terminal The terminal may use the icon sub-area where the icon on which the edit operation performed by the user is located is located as the target icon sub-area.

可选地，如果用户对目标图标区域的目标图标子区域中显示的目标图标进行了编辑操作，那么移动终端可以于目标图标区域的目标图标子区域中显示的目标图标触发编辑指令。上述编辑操作可以指的是用户对目标图标的长按操作，也可以指的是用户对目标图标的连续点击操作，本申请对编辑操作的具体实施方式不作限定。Optionally, if the user performs an editing operation on the target icon displayed in the target icon sub-area of the target icon area, the mobile terminal may trigger an editing instruction on the target icon displayed in the target icon sub-area of the target icon area. The above editing operation may refer to the user's long press operation on the target icon, or may refer to the user's continuous clicking operation on the target icon. This application does not limit the specific implementation of the editing operation.

可选地，图13a为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图13a所示，1310为移动终端的显示界面，显示界面包括图标区域1311，图标区域1311的区域标识为“游戏”，且图标区域1311包含四个图标子区域，以目标图标区域为图标区域1311为例，假设目标图标子区域为目标图标区域中图标K所在的图标子区域，当用户对目标图标区域的目标图标子区域中显示的目标图标(即图标K)执行编辑操作时，移动终端可以于目标图标触发编辑指令。Optionally, FIG. 13a is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 13a, 1310 is a display interface of a mobile terminal, and the display interface includes an icon area 1311, and the area of the icon area 1311 is identified as "game ", and the icon area 1311 includes four icon sub-areas, taking the target icon area as the icon area 1311 as an example, assuming that the target icon sub-area is the icon sub-area where the icon K is located in the target icon area, when the user selects the target icon area of the target icon area When the target icon (ie, icon K) displayed in the icon sub-area performs an editing operation, the mobile terminal can trigger an editing instruction on the target icon.

可选地，编辑指令为滑动指令，移动终端可以确定滑动指令所指示的滑动轨迹的终点位置，并根据终点位置将目标图标进行移动，目标图标移动后的位置和终点位置相匹配。可选地，如果用户对目标图标进行了滑动操作，那么移动终端可以于目标图标触发滑动指令，其中滑动指令所指示的滑动轨迹的终点位置可以是用户执行的滑动操作所指示的滑动轨迹的终点位置。Optionally, the edit command is a slide command, and the mobile terminal may determine the end position of the slide track indicated by the slide command, and move the target icon according to the end position, and the moved position of the target icon matches the end position. Optionally, if the user performs a slide operation on the target icon, the mobile terminal may trigger a slide command on the target icon, wherein the end position of the slide track indicated by the slide command may be the end point of the slide track indicated by the slide operation performed by the user Location.

可选地，移动终端可以使目标图标处于可移动状态，如果用户对处于可移动状态的目标图标进行了滑动操作，那么移动终端可以于目标图标触发滑动指令。可选地，如果用户对目标图标执行了长按操作，那么移动终端可以响应用户执行的长按操作，使目标图标处于可移动状态，当用户对处于可移动状态的目标图标执行滑动操作时，移动终端可以于目标图标触发滑动指令。可选地，如果用户对目标图标执行了连续点击操作，那么移动终端可以响应用户执行的连续点击操作，使目标图标处于可移动状态，当用户对处于可移动状态的目标图标执行滑动操作时，移动终端可以于目标图标触发滑动指令。Optionally, the mobile terminal may make the target icon in a movable state, and if the user performs a sliding operation on the movable target icon, the mobile terminal may trigger a sliding instruction on the target icon. Optionally, if the user performs a long press operation on the target icon, the mobile terminal may make the target icon in a movable state in response to the long press operation performed by the user, and when the user performs a sliding operation on the target icon in the movable state, The mobile terminal can trigger a sliding instruction on the target icon. Optionally, if the user performs continuous clicking operations on the target icon, the mobile terminal may respond to the continuous clicking operations performed by the user to make the target icon in a movable state. When the user performs a sliding operation on the movable target icon, The mobile terminal can trigger a sliding instruction on the target icon.

可选地，移动终端根据终点位置将目标图标进行移动的方式包括以下四种中至少一种：Optionally, the manner in which the mobile terminal moves the target icon according to the end position includes at least one of the following four types:

一、若终点位置为目标图标区域中除目标图标子区域以外的任一图标子区域所处的位置，则将目标图标显示在终点位置指示的图标子区域中。1. If the end position is the position of any icon sub-area except the target icon sub-area in the target icon area, display the target icon in the icon sub-area indicated by the end point position.

可选地，图13b为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图11b所示，以目标图标区域为图标区域1318为例，假设目标图标子区域为目标图标区域中的第一个图标子区域，目标图标为图标J，若用户对目标图标执行了滑动操作，且用户执行的滑动操作所指示的滑动轨迹的终点位置为图标M对应的图标子区域所处的位置，那么移动终端可以将目标图标显示在终点位置指示的图标子区域(即目标图标区域的第四个图标子区域)中，并将目标图标区域(即图标区域1320)显示在显示界面1319中。Optionally, FIG. 13b is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11b , taking the icon area 1318 as the target icon area as an example, it is assumed that the target icon sub-area is the first icon area in the target icon area. icon sub-area, the target icon is icon J, if the user performs a sliding operation on the target icon, and the end position of the sliding track indicated by the sliding operation performed by the user is the position of the icon sub-area corresponding to icon M, then move The terminal may display the target icon in the icon subarea indicated by the end position (ie, the fourth icon subarea of the target icon area), and display the target icon area (ie, the icon area 1320 ) on the display interface 1319 .

二、若终点位置为目标图标区域中除各个图标子区域所处位置以外的位置，则取消显示目标图标。2. If the end point is at a location other than the location of each icon sub-area in the target icon area, cancel displaying the target icon.

可选地，图13c为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图13c所示，以目标图标区域为图标区域1322为例，假设目标图标子区域为目标图标区域中的第一个图标子区域，目标图标为图标J，若用户对目标图标执行了滑动操作，且滑动操作所指示的滑动轨迹的终点位置为目标图标区域中除各个图标子区域所处位置以外的位置，那么移动终端可以取消对目标图标的显示，从而得到显示界面1323，显示界面1323中的目标图标区域(即图标区域1324)在各个图标子区域中显示的图标不包括图标J。Optionally, FIG. 13c is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 13c, taking the target icon area as the icon area 1322 as an example, it is assumed that the target icon sub-area is the first icon area in the target icon area. icon sub-area, the target icon is icon J, if the user performs a sliding operation on the target icon, and the end position of the sliding track indicated by the sliding operation is a position other than the position of each icon sub-area in the target icon area, then The mobile terminal may cancel the display of the target icon, thereby obtaining the display interface 1323. Icons displayed in each icon sub-area in the target icon area (ie icon area 1324) of the display interface 1323 do not include the icon J.

三、若终点位置为显示屏幕中除目标图标区域所处位置以外的图标显示位置，则将目标图标显示在图标显示位置上。3. If the end point is an icon display position other than the target icon area on the display screen, display the target icon at the icon display position.

可选地，图13d为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图13d所示，以目标图标区域为图标区域1326，且目标图标为图标J为例，若用户对目标图标执行了滑动操作，且滑动操作所指示的滑动轨迹的终点位置为目标图标区域所处位置以外的图标显示位置1327，那么移动终端可以将目标图标显示在显示界面1328的图标显示位置1330上。可以理解的是，显示界面1328中的目标图标区域(即图标区域1329)不包括图标J。Optionally, FIG. 13d is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 13d, taking the target icon area as icon area 1326 and the target icon as icon J as an example, if the user executes If the sliding operation is performed, and the end position of the sliding track indicated by the sliding operation is an icon display position 1327 other than the position of the target icon area, then the mobile terminal can display the target icon on the icon display position 1330 of the display interface 1328 . It can be understood that the icon J is not included in the target icon area (ie icon area 1329 ) in the display interface 1328 .

四、若终点位置为显示屏幕中除目标图标区域以外的任一图标区域，则将目标图标移动至终点位置指示的图标区域中。4. If the end point is any icon area in the display screen except the target icon area, move the target icon to the icon area indicated by the end point.

可选地，图13e为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图13e所示，以目标图标区域为图标区域1332，且目标图标为图标J为例，若用户对目标图标执行了滑动操作，且滑动操作所指示的滑动轨迹的终点位置为图标区域1333所在的位置，那么移动终端可以将目标图标移动至终点位置指示的图标区域1333中，从而得到显示界面1334。可选地，移动终端可以将目标图标(即图标J)显示在终点位置指示的图标区域的任一图标子区域或固定图标子区域中，从而将显示有目标图标的图标区域1336显示在显示界面1334中，移动终端也可以将目标图标不显示在终点位置指示的图标区域的任一图标子区域中，本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, FIG. 13e is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 13e , taking the target icon area as icon area 1332 and the target icon as icon J as an example, if the user executes If the sliding operation is performed, and the end position of the sliding track indicated by the sliding operation is the position where the icon area 1333 is located, then the mobile terminal can move the target icon to the icon area 1333 indicated by the end position, so as to obtain the display interface 1334. Optionally, the mobile terminal may display the target icon (i.e., icon J) in any icon subregion or fixed icon subregion of the icon region indicated by the end point position, thereby displaying the icon region 1336 in which the target icon is displayed on the display interface In 1334, the mobile terminal may also not display the target icon in any icon sub-area of the icon area indicated by the end point position, which is not limited in this application.

S1202、响应编辑指令，显示应用编辑菜单。S1202. Display an application editing menu in response to the editing instruction.

移动终端在于目标图标区域的目标图标子区域中显示的目标图标触发编辑指令之后，可以响应编辑指令，显示目标图标对应的应用编辑菜单。上述应用编辑菜单可以包含各个应用编辑功能对应的组件，其中应用编辑功能可以为卸载功能或者更新功能等。After the target icon displayed in the target icon sub-area of the target icon area triggers the editing instruction, the mobile terminal may respond to the editing command and display the application editing menu corresponding to the target icon. The above-mentioned application editing menu may include components corresponding to various application editing functions, wherein the application editing function may be an uninstall function or an update function.

可选地，如图13a所示，以目标图标区域为图标区域1311为例，移动终端在于目标图标区域的目标图标子区域中显示的目标图标(即图标K)触发编辑指令之后，可以响应编辑指令，显示应用编辑菜单1313，应用编辑菜单1313为目标图标区域(即图标区域1314)中的目标图标对应的应用编辑菜单，该应用编辑菜单可以包括“移出”组件、“更新”组件以及“卸载”组件等。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 13a, taking the target icon area as the icon area 1311 as an example, after the target icon (i.e. icon K) displayed in the target icon sub-area of the target icon area triggers the editing instruction, the mobile terminal may respond to the editing command. command to display the application editing menu 1313, the application editing menu 1313 is the application editing menu corresponding to the target icon in the target icon area (i.e. icon area 1314), and the application editing menu may include "remove" component, "update" component and "uninstall "Components etc.

S1203、于应用编辑菜单触发应用功能选择指令，确定应用功能选择指令选中的应用编辑功能。S1203. Trigger an application function selection instruction in the application editing menu, and determine the application editing function selected by the application function selection instruction.

可选地，如果用户对应用编辑菜单进行了应用功能选择操作，那么移动终端可以于应用编辑菜单触发应用功能选择指令，并确定应用功能选择指令选中的应用编辑功能，其中应用功能选择指令选中的应用编辑功能可以指的是应用功能选择操作选中的应用编辑功能。Optionally, if the user performs an application function selection operation on the application editing menu, the mobile terminal may trigger an application function selection instruction on the application editing menu, and determine the application editing function selected by the application function selection instruction, wherein the application function selection instruction selects The application editing function may refer to the application editing function selected by the application function selection operation.

可选地，上述应用功能选择操作可以指的是用户对应用编辑菜单包含的任一应用编辑功能的点击操作，也就是说，选中的应用编辑功能即用户执行的点击操作所作用的应用编辑功能。上述应用功能选择操作也可以指的是用户对应用编辑菜单的应用功能滑动操作，该应用功能滑动操作可以将应用编辑菜单中的任一应用编辑功能滑动至应用功能确定区域，也就是说，选中的应用编辑功能即为应用功能确定区域中显示的应用编辑功能，其中应用功能确定区域可以是移动终端设置的显示区域，也可以是用户设置的显示区域，本申请对此不作限定。本申请对应用功能选择操作的具体实施方式不作限定。Optionally, the above application function selection operation may refer to the user's click operation on any application editing function included in the application editing menu, that is, the selected application editing function is the application editing function that the user performs the click operation on. . The above application function selection operation may also refer to the user's application function sliding operation on the application editing menu. The application function sliding operation can slide any application editing function in the application editing menu to the application function determination area, that is, select The application editing function is the application editing function displayed in the application function determination area, where the application function determination area may be the display area set by the mobile terminal or the display area set by the user, which is not limited in this application. This application does not limit the specific implementation manner of the application function selection operation.

可选地，如图13a所示，在移动终端显示应用编辑菜单1313之后，如果用户对“卸载”组件执行了应用功能选择操作，可选地用户点击应用编辑菜单1313中的“卸载”组件，那么移动终端可以响应用户的点击操作，生成应用功能选择指令，并确定用户执行的应用功能选择操作选中的应用编辑功能为卸载功能。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 13a, after the mobile terminal displays the application editing menu 1313, if the user performs an application function selection operation on the "uninstall" component, optionally the user clicks the "uninstall" component in the application editing menu 1313, Then the mobile terminal can generate an application function selection instruction in response to the user's click operation, and determine that the application editing function selected by the application function selection operation performed by the user is an uninstall function.

可选地，移动终端响应编辑指令，显示应用编辑菜单之后，移动终端可以于应用编辑菜单触发调整指令，然后响应调整指令，对应用编辑菜单的显示位置或显示尺寸进行调整，并显示调整后的应用编辑菜单。然后，移动终端可以于调整后的应用编辑菜单触发应用功能选择指令。可选地，如果用户对应用编辑菜单进行了调整操作，那么移动终端可以于应用编辑菜单触发调整指令，然后响应调整指令，对应用编辑菜单的显示位置或显示尺寸进行调整，并显示调整后的应用编辑菜单，当用户对调整后的应用编辑菜单执行应用功能选择操作时，移动终端可以于调整后的应用编辑菜单触发应用功能选择指令。Optionally, after the mobile terminal responds to the editing instruction and displays the application editing menu, the mobile terminal can trigger an adjustment instruction on the application editing menu, then respond to the adjustment instruction, adjust the display position or display size of the application editing menu, and display the adjusted App edit menu. Then, the mobile terminal can trigger an application function selection instruction in the adjusted application editing menu. Optionally, if the user performs an adjustment operation on the application editing menu, the mobile terminal may trigger an adjustment instruction on the application editing menu, then respond to the adjustment instruction, adjust the display position or display size of the application editing menu, and display the adjusted Application editing menu, when the user performs an application function selection operation on the adjusted application editing menu, the mobile terminal can trigger an application function selection instruction on the adjusted application editing menu.

上述调整操作可以指的是用户对应用编辑菜单的拉动操作，可选地，用户可以长按应用编辑菜单的边缘，移动终端响应用户执行的长按操作，使应用编辑菜单处于可调整状态，此时，用户可以拉动应用编辑菜单的边缘以调整应用编辑菜单的显示尺寸，可以理解的是应用编辑菜单的边缘可以指的是应用编辑菜单中与组成应用编辑菜单的边框之间的距离小于预设距离阈值的部分区域，其中预设距离阈值可以是移动终端设置的，也可以是用户设置的，如2毫米(mm)。上述调整操作也可以指的是用户对应用编辑菜单的移动操作，可选地，用户可以对应用编辑菜单执行长按操作，移动终端响应用户执行的长按操作，使应用编辑菜单处于可移动状态，此时，用户可以对应用编辑菜单执行滑动操作以调整应用编辑菜单的显示位置。本申请对调整操作的具体实施方式不作限定。The above adjustment operation may refer to the user's pulling operation on the application editing menu. Optionally, the user may press and hold the edge of the application editing menu, and the mobile terminal responds to the long pressing operation performed by the user to make the application editing menu in an adjustable state. , the user can pull the edge of the application editing menu to adjust the display size of the application editing menu. It can be understood that the edge of the application editing menu can refer to the distance between the application editing menu and the frame that makes up the application editing menu is less than the preset A partial area of the distance threshold, where the preset distance threshold may be set by the mobile terminal or by the user, such as 2 millimeters (mm). The above adjustment operation may also refer to the user's mobile operation on the application editing menu. Optionally, the user may perform a long-press operation on the application editing menu, and the mobile terminal responds to the long-press operation performed by the user to make the application editing menu in a movable state , at this point, the user can perform a sliding operation on the application editing menu to adjust the display position of the application editing menu. The present application does not limit the specific implementation manner of the adjustment operation.

可选地，图13f为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图13f所示，显示界面1337中包括应用编辑菜单1338，如果用户对应用编辑菜单1338执行了调整操作，那么移动终端可以于应用编辑菜单1338触发调整指令，响应调整指令，对应用编辑菜单1338的显示位置或显示尺寸进行调整，并在显示界面1339中显示调整后的应用编辑菜单1340。然后，如果用户对调整后的应用编辑菜单1340进行了应用功能选择操作，可选地用户点击应用编辑菜单1340中的“卸载”组件，以实现对应用编辑菜单1340的应用功能选择操作，那么移动终端可以于调整后的应用编辑菜单1340触发应用功能选择指令，从而确定应用功能选择指令选中的应用编辑功能，该选中的应用编辑功能可以为卸载功能。Optionally, FIG. 13f is a schematic diagram of another icon provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 13f, the display interface 1337 includes an application editing menu 1338. If the user performs an adjustment operation on the application editing menu 1338, then move The terminal can trigger an adjustment instruction on the application editing menu 1338 , adjust the display position or display size of the application editing menu 1338 in response to the adjustment instruction, and display the adjusted application editing menu 1340 on the display interface 1339 . Then, if the user performs an application function selection operation on the adjusted application editing menu 1340, optionally the user clicks the "uninstall" component in the application editing menu 1340 to realize the application function selection operation on the application editing menu 1340, then the mobile The terminal may trigger an application function selection instruction on the adjusted application editing menu 1340, so as to determine the application editing function selected by the application function selection instruction, and the selected application editing function may be an uninstall function.

S1204、按照选中或编辑指令对应的应用编辑功能对目标图标或者目标图标对应的应用进行处理。S1204. Process the target icon or the application corresponding to the target icon according to the application editing function corresponding to the selection or editing instruction.

可选地，选中的或编辑指令对应的应用编辑功能包括以下至少一种：卸载功能、用于指示从目标图标区域中移出图标的移出功能，或更新功能；移动终端按照选中的应用编辑功能对目标图标或者目标图标对应的应用进行处理的具体实施过程可以为：卸载目标图标对应的应用，并删除目标图标，或者将目标图标从目标图标区域中移出；在删除目标图标之后，在目标图标区域所包含的图标中确定待显示在目标图标子区域以及目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中的图标；将确定的图标显示在目标图标子区域以及目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中。Optionally, the application editing function selected or corresponding to the editing instruction includes at least one of the following: an uninstall function, a removal function used to indicate that an icon is removed from the target icon area, or an update function; The specific implementation process for processing the target icon or the application corresponding to the target icon may be: uninstall the application corresponding to the target icon, and delete the target icon, or move the target icon out of the target icon area; Among the included icons, the icon to be displayed in the target icon sub-region and the icon sub-region after the target icon sub-region is determined; and the determined icon is displayed in the target icon sub-region and the icon sub-region after the target icon sub-region.

可选地，如图13a所示，应用编辑菜单1313为目标图标区域(即图标区域1314)中的目标图标(即图标K)对应的应用编辑菜单，目标图标所在的图标子区域为目标图标子区域，目标图标区域包含四个图标子区域，以选中的应用编辑功能为卸载功能为例，移动终端可以卸载目标图标对应的应用，并删除目标图标。假设删除目标图标后的目标图标区域包含图标J、L、M、O、P以及Q，那么移动终端可以在图标J、L、M、O、P以及Q中确定待显示在目标图标子区域以及目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中的图标，由于目标图标子区域为目标图标区域中的第二个图标子区域，那么移动终端确定的待显示在目标图标子区域以及目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中的图标的数量为3。假设确定的图标为图标L、M以及O，那么移动终端可以将图标L、M以及O显示在目标图标子区域以及目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中，从而得到显示界面1315。显示界面1315包含目标图标区域(即图标区域1316)，目标图标区域的图标子区域中显示的图标包括图标J、L、M以及O，且目标图标区域不包含图标K。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 13a, the application editing menu 1313 is the application editing menu corresponding to the target icon (ie icon K) in the target icon area (ie icon area 1314), and the icon sub-area where the target icon is located is the target icon sub-area. area, the target icon area includes four icon sub-areas, taking the selected application editing function as an uninstall function as an example, the mobile terminal can uninstall the application corresponding to the target icon and delete the target icon. Assuming that the target icon area after the target icon is deleted contains icons J, L, M, O, P, and Q, the mobile terminal can determine among the icons J, L, M, O, P, and Q to be displayed in the target icon sub-area and Icons in the icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area, since the target icon sub-area is the second icon sub-area in the target icon sub-area, the icons to be displayed after the target icon sub-area and the target icon sub-area determined by the mobile terminal The number of icons in the icon sub-area is three. Assuming that the determined icons are icons L, M, and O, then the mobile terminal may display the icons L, M, and O in the target icon sub-area and the icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area, thereby obtaining the display interface 1315 . The display interface 1315 includes a target icon area (i.e. icon area 1316), the icons displayed in the icon sub-area of the target icon area include icons J, L, M, and O, and the target icon area does not include icon K.

可选地，移动终端在目标图标区域所包含的图标中确定待显示在目标图标子区域以及目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中的图标的具体实施过程可以为：将显示在目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中的图标，以及目标图标区域所包含的所有图标中除显示在目标图标区域的各个图标子区域的图标以外的任一图标，作为确定的图标。然后，移动终端可以将确定的图标显示在目标图标子区域以及目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中。Optionally, the specific implementation process for the mobile terminal to determine the icon to be displayed in the target icon sub-region and the icon sub-region after the target icon sub-region from among the icons included in the target icon sub-region may be: to display in the target icon sub-region Icons in the subsequent icon sub-area, and any icon among all the icons included in the target icon area except the icons displayed in each icon sub-area of the target icon area, are used as the determined icons. Then, the mobile terminal may display the determined icon in the target icon sub-region and the icon sub-region after the target icon sub-region.

可选地，如图13a所示，以目标图标区域为图标区域1314为例，目标图标区域包含图标J、K、L、M、O、P以及Q，假设目标图标为图标K，图标K所在的图标子区域为目标图标子区域，且显示在目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中的图标包括图标L和图标M。假设移动终端删除了目标图标，那么移动终端在目标图标区域所包含的图标中确定待显示在目标图标子区域以及目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中的图标时，可以将显示在目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中的图标(即图标L和图标M)，以及目标图标区域所包含的所有图标中除显示在目标图标区域的各个图标子区域的图标以外的任一图标(即图标O、P以及Q中的任一图标)，作为确定的图标。假设移动终端在图标O、P以及Q中确定的任一图标为图标O，那么移动终端可以将图标L、M以及O作为确定的图标，并可以将图标L、M以及O显示在目标图标子区域以及目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中，从而得到显示界面1315。显示界面1315包括目标图标区域(即图标区域1316)，显示在目标图标区域的各个图标子区域的图标包括图标J、L、M以及O。Optionally, as shown in Figure 13a, taking the target icon area as the icon area 1314 as an example, the target icon area includes icons J, K, L, M, O, P, and Q, assuming that the target icon is icon K, where icon K is The icon subarea of is the target icon subarea, and the icons displayed in the icon subarea after the target icon subarea include icon L and icon M. Assuming that the mobile terminal deletes the target icon, when the mobile terminal determines the icon to be displayed in the target icon sub-area and the icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area among the icons contained in the target icon area, it can display the icon in the target icon sub-area. Icons in the icon sub-area behind the area (i.e. icon L and icon M), and any icon (i.e. icon O , P and Q) as the confirmed icon. Assuming that any icon determined by the mobile terminal among the icons O, P and Q is the icon O, then the mobile terminal can use the icons L, M and O as the determined icons, and can display the icons L, M and O on the target icon sub- area and the icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area, so as to obtain the display interface 1315. The display interface 1315 includes a target icon area (ie icon area 1316 ), and icons displayed in each icon sub-area of the target icon area include icons J, L, M, and O.

可选地，移动终端将显示在目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中的图标，以及目标图标区域所包含的所有图标中除显示在目标图标区域的各个图标子区域的图标以外的任一图标，作为确定的图标的具体实施过程可以是以下至少一种：将目标图标子区域之后的第一个图标子区域中显示的图标，确定为待显示在目标图标子区域的图标；将目标图标子区域之后的第二个图标子区域中显示的图标，确定为待显示在目标图标子区域之后的第一个图标子区域的图标，直至将目标图标区域中位于最后一个图标子区域的图标确定为待显示在目标图标区域中位于倒数第二个图标子区域的图标；或者，从目标图标区域所包含的所有图标中除显示在目标图标区域的各个图标子区域的图标以外的图标中，确定待显示在目标图标区域中位于最后一个图标子区域的图标。然后，移动终端可以将确定的图标显示在目标图标子区域以及目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中。Optionally, the mobile terminal will display the icons in the icon sub-area behind the target icon sub-area, and any icon in all the icons contained in the target icon area except the icons displayed in each icon sub-area of the target icon area , as the specific implementation process of the determined icon may be at least one of the following: the icon displayed in the first icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area is determined as the icon to be displayed in the target icon sub-area; The icon displayed in the second icon sub-area after the target icon area is determined as the icon to be displayed in the first icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area, until the icon in the last icon sub-area in the target icon area is determined as The icon to be displayed in the penultimate icon sub-area in the target icon area; or, from all the icons contained in the target icon area except for the icons displayed in each icon sub-area of the target icon area, determine the icon to be displayed Displays the icon in the last icon subarea in the target icon area. Then, the mobile terminal may display the determined icon in the target icon sub-region and the icon sub-region after the target icon sub-region.

可选地，如图13a所示，以目标图标区域为图标区域1314为例，目标图标区域包含图标J、K、L、M、O、P以及Q，目标图标为图标K，移动终端可以将目标图标子区域(即目标图标所在的图标子区域)之后的第一个图标子区域中显示的图标(即图标L)，确定为待显示在目标图标子区域的图标；将目标图标子区域之后的第二个图标子区域中显示的图标(即图标M)，确定为待显示在目标图标子区域之后的第一个图标子区域的图标，由于图标M为目标图标区域中位于最后一个图标子区域的图标，也就是说，移动终端将目标图标区域中位于最后一个图标子区域的图标确定为待显示在目标图标区域中位于倒数第二个图标子区域的图标。接下来，移动终端可以从目标图标区域所包含的所有图标中除显示在目标图标区域的各个图标子区域的图标以外的图标(即图标O、P以及Q)中，确定待显示在目标图标区域中位于最后一个图标子区域的图标。假设移动终端确定的待显示在目标图标区域中位于最后一个图标子区域的图标为图标O，那么移动终端可以将图标L、M以及O显示在目标图标子区域以及目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中。可以理解的是，移动终端可以将图标L显示在目标图标子区域中，将图标M显示在目标图标子区域之后的第一个图标子区域中，并将图标O显示在目标图标区域的最后一个图标子区域中，并将目标图标区域(即图标区域1316)显示在显示界面1315中，目标图标区域的各个图标子区域中显示的图标包括图标J、L、M以及O。可以理解的是，目标图标子区域之前的各个图标子区域中显示的图标保持不变，举例来说，当目标图标区域为图标区域1314时，图标J位于目标图标区域的第一个图标子区域中，当目标图标区域为图标区域1316时，图标J仍位于目标图标区域的第一个图标子区域中，其中目标图标区域的第一个图标子区域为目标图标子区域之前的图标子区域。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 13a, taking the target icon area as the icon area 1314 as an example, the target icon area includes icons J, K, L, M, O, P, and Q, and the target icon is the icon K. The mobile terminal can set The icon (ie icon L) displayed in the first icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area (i.e. the icon sub-area where the target icon is located) is determined to be the icon to be displayed in the target icon sub-area; after the target icon sub-area The icon (i.e. icon M) displayed in the second icon sub-area is determined to be the icon of the first icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area, because icon M is the last icon sub-area in the target icon area The icons in the area, that is, the mobile terminal determines the icon located in the last icon subarea in the target icon area as the icon to be displayed in the penultimate icon subarea in the target icon area. Next, the mobile terminal can determine the icons to be displayed in the target icon area from among all the icons included in the target icon area except for the icons displayed in each icon sub-area of the target icon area (ie icons O, P, and Q). The icon that is the last icon subsection in the . Assuming that the icon to be displayed in the last icon sub-area in the target icon area determined by the mobile terminal is the icon O, then the mobile terminal can display the icons L, M, and O in the target icon sub-area and the icon sub-areas behind the target icon sub-area. in the area. It can be understood that the mobile terminal can display the icon L in the target icon sub-area, display the icon M in the first icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area, and display the icon O in the last icon sub-area of the target icon area. icon sub-area, and display the target icon area (ie icon area 1316) on the display interface 1315, and the icons displayed in each icon sub-area of the target icon area include icons J, L, M and O. It can be understood that the icons displayed in each icon sub-area before the target icon sub-area remain unchanged. For example, when the target icon area is the icon area 1314, the icon J is located in the first icon sub-area of the target icon area , when the target icon area is the icon area 1316, the icon J is still located in the first icon subarea of the target icon area, wherein the first icon subarea of the target icon area is the icon subarea before the target icon subarea.

可选地，移动终端可确定编辑指令的触发位置；若触发位置为目标图标区域中显示有图标的任一图标子区域所处的位置，则确定触发位置指示的图标子区域为目标图标子区域；若触发位置为目标图标区域中除显示有图标的所有图标子区域所处的位置以外的位置，则响应编辑指令，显示区域编辑菜单，于区域编辑菜单触发区域功能选择指令，确定区域功能选择指令选中的区域编辑功能，按照选中的区域编辑功能对目标图标区域进行处理。Optionally, the mobile terminal may determine the trigger position of the editing instruction; if the trigger position is the position of any icon sub-area in which an icon is displayed in the target icon area, then determine that the icon sub-area indicated by the trigger position is the target icon sub-area ; If the trigger position is a position other than the position of all icon sub-areas displayed in the target icon area, then respond to the edit command, display the area edit menu, trigger the area function selection command in the area edit menu, and determine the area function selection Command the selected area editing function, and process the target icon area according to the selected area editing function.

上述编辑指令在目标图标区域中的触发位置不同时，移动终端可以根据不同的触发位置确定编辑指令所作用的不同对象，其中编辑指令所作用的对象可以包括目标图标和目标图标区域。When the trigger positions of the editing commands in the target icon area are different, the mobile terminal may determine different objects on which the editing commands act according to different trigger positions, wherein the objects on which the editing commands act may include the target icon and the target icon area.

可选地，若触发位置指的是目标图标区域中显示有图标的任一图标子区域所处的位置，那么移动终端可以将触发位置指示的图标子区域作为目标图标子区域，也就是说，编辑指令所作用的对象为显示在目标图标子区域中的目标图标。若触发位置指的是目标图标区域中除显示有图标的所有图标子区域所处的位置以外的位置，那么移动终端可以将目标图标区域作为编辑指令所作用的对象。Optionally, if the trigger position refers to the position of any icon sub-area in which an icon is displayed in the target icon area, then the mobile terminal may use the icon sub-area indicated by the trigger position as the target icon sub-area, that is, The target icon displayed in the target icon sub-area is acted on by the editing command. If the trigger position refers to a position in the target icon area other than the positions of all icon sub-areas displaying icons, then the mobile terminal may use the target icon area as the target of the editing instruction.

可以理解的是，当移动终端确定触发位置指示的图标子区域为目标图标子区域时，移动终端可以响应编辑指令，显示目标图标对应的应用编辑菜单。It can be understood that when the mobile terminal determines that the icon subregion indicated by the trigger position is the target icon subregion, the mobile terminal may respond to the editing instruction and display the application editing menu corresponding to the target icon.

可选地，如图13a所示，以目标图标区域为图标区域1311为例，目标图标区域包括四个图标子区域，假设触发位置为图标K所在的图标子区域所处的位置，图标K所在的图标子区域为目标图标区域包括的四个图标子区域中的一个图标子区域，那么移动终端可以确定触发位置指示的图标子区域为目标图标子区域，从而响应编辑指令，显示目标图标(即图标K)对应的应用编辑菜单1313。Optionally, as shown in Figure 13a, taking the target icon area as the icon area 1311 as an example, the target icon area includes four icon sub-areas, assuming that the trigger position is the position of the icon sub-area where the icon K is located, and the icon K is located The icon sub-area is one of the four icon sub-areas included in the target icon area, then the mobile terminal can determine that the icon sub-area indicated by the trigger position is the target icon sub-area, thereby responding to the editing instruction and displaying the target icon (i.e. Icon K) corresponds to the application editing menu 1313.

可选地，当移动终端响应编辑指令，显示区域编辑菜单后，如果用户对区域编辑菜单进行了区域功能选择操作，那么移动终端可以于区域编辑菜单触发区域功能选择指令。Optionally, after the mobile terminal responds to the edit instruction and displays the region edit menu, if the user performs a region function selection operation on the region edit menu, then the mobile terminal can trigger the region function selection instruction on the region edit menu.

上述区域功能选择操作可以指的是用户对区域编辑菜单的点击操作，也就是说，选中的区域编辑功能可以为点击操作所作用的区域编辑功能；也可以指的是用户对区域编辑菜单的滑动操作，该滑动操作可以将区域编辑菜单中的任一区域编辑功能滑动至区域功能确定区域，那么移动终端可以将区域功能确定区域中显示的区域编辑功能作为选中的区域编辑功能，本申请对区域功能选择操作的具体实施方式不作限定。上述区域功能确定区域可以是移动终端设置的，也可以是用户设置的，本申请对此不作限定。The above region function selection operation may refer to the user's click operation on the region edit menu, that is to say, the selected region edit function may be the region edit function effected by the click operation; it may also refer to the user's sliding of the region edit menu. Operation, the sliding operation can slide any area editing function in the area editing menu to the area function determination area, then the mobile terminal can use the area editing function displayed in the area function determination area as the selected area editing function. The specific implementation manner of the function selection operation is not limited. The above area function determination area may be set by the mobile terminal or by the user, which is not limited in this application.

可选地，图13g为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标的示意图，如图13g所示，以目标图标区域为图标区域1342为例，若触发位置为目标图标区域中除显示有图标的所有图标子区域所处的位置以外的位置，也就是说，若用户在目标图标区域中除显示有图标的所有图标子区域所处的位置以外的位置，对目标图标区域执行了编辑操作，从而使移动终端于目标图标区域触发编辑指令，那么移动终端可以响应编辑指令，显示区域编辑菜单1345，区域编辑菜单1345可以包括“设置属性”组件或“重命名”组件等。如果用户对区域编辑菜单1345中的“设置属性”组件进行了区域功能选择操作，可选地用户点击区域编辑菜单1345中的“设置属性”组件，以实现对区域编辑菜单1345的区域功能选择操作，那么移动终端可以于区域编辑菜单1345触发区域功能选择指令，确定区域功能选择指令选中的区域编辑功能，并按照选中的区域编辑功能对目标图标区域(即图标区域1344)进行处理。Optionally, FIG. 13g is a schematic diagram of another icon provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 13g, taking the target icon area as the icon area 1342 as an example, if the trigger position is the icon displayed in the target icon area In other words, if the user performs an editing operation on the target icon area at a position other than the position of all icon sub-areas where icons are displayed in the target icon area, thereby If the mobile terminal triggers an editing instruction in the target icon area, then the mobile terminal can respond to the editing instruction and display an area editing menu 1345, which can include a "set attribute" component or a "rename" component, etc. If the user performs an area function selection operation on the "Set Properties" component in the area edit menu 1345, optionally the user clicks on the "Set Properties" component in the area edit menu 1345 to realize the area function selection operation on the area edit menu 1345 , then the mobile terminal can trigger the area function selection command in the area editing menu 1345, determine the area editing function selected by the area function selection command, and process the target icon area (ie icon area 1344) according to the selected area editing function.

可选地，目标图标区域包括第一图标子区域和第二图标子区域，第一图标子区域为目标图标区域中显示有图标的所有图标子区域中的前M个图标子区域，第二图标子区域为目标图标区域的所有图标子区域中除第一图标子区域以外的图标子区域，M为正整数，M大于零且小于目标图标区域的所有图标子区域的数量；移动终端可确定编辑指令的触发位置；若触发位置为第一图标子区域所处位置，则确定触发位置指示的图标子区域为目标图标子区域；若触发位置为第二图标子区域所处位置或目标图标区域的所有图标子区域所处的位置以外的位置，则响应编辑指令，显示区域编辑菜单，于区域编辑菜单触发区域功能选择指令，确定区域功能选择指令选中的区域编辑功能，按照选中的区域编辑功能对目标图标区域进行处理。Optionally, the target icon area includes a first icon sub-area and a second icon sub-area, the first icon sub-area is the first M icon sub-areas in all icon sub-areas displaying icons in the target icon area, and the second icon sub-area is The sub-area is the icon sub-area except the first icon sub-area in all the icon sub-areas of the target icon area, M is a positive integer, and M is greater than zero and less than the number of all icon sub-areas of the target icon area; the mobile terminal can determine to edit The trigger position of the instruction; if the trigger position is the position of the first icon sub-area, then determine that the icon sub-area indicated by the trigger position is the target icon sub-area; if the trigger position is the position of the second icon sub-area or the target icon area If all icon sub-areas are in positions other than the ones where the sub-areas are located, then the editing command will be responded to, and the area editing menu will be displayed, and the area function selection command will be triggered in the area editing menu to determine the area editing function selected by the area function selection command, and then edit the area according to the selected area editing function. Target icon area for processing.

同理，编辑指令在目标图标区域中的触发位置不同时，移动终端可以根据不同的触发位置确定编辑指令所作用的不同对象，其中编辑指令所作用的对象可以包括目标图标和目标图标区域。Similarly, when the trigger positions of the edit command in the target icon area are different, the mobile terminal may determine different objects on which the edit command acts according to different trigger positions, wherein the objects on which the edit command acts may include the target icon and the target icon area.

可选地，若触发位置为第一图标子区域所处位置，那么移动终端可以将触发位置指示的图标子区域作为目标图标子区域，也就是说，移动终端可以将目标图标子区域中显示的目标图标作为编辑指令所作用的对象。若触发位置为第二图标子区域所处位置或目标图标区域的所有图标子区域所处的位置以外的位置，那么移动终端可以将目标图标区域作为编辑指令所作用的对象。Optionally, if the trigger position is where the first icon sub-area is located, then the mobile terminal may use the icon sub-area indicated by the trigger position as the target icon sub-area, that is, the mobile terminal may use the icon sub-area displayed in the target icon sub-area The target icon serves as the object on which the edit command acts. If the trigger position is a position other than the position of the second icon sub-region or the positions of all icon sub-regions of the target icon region, then the mobile terminal may use the target icon region as the target of the editing instruction.

可选地，如图13a所示，以目标图标区域为图标区域1311为例，假设M为3，那么第一图标子区域可以为目标图标区域中显示有图标的所有图标子区域中的前M个图标子区域，也就是说，第一图标子区域可以是目标图标区域中显示有图标J、K以及L的图标子区域。假设编辑指令的触发位置为图标K所在的图标子区域所处的位置，又由于第一图标子区域包括图标 K所在的图标子区域，可以理解的是，触发位置即为第一图标子区域所处的位置，那么移动终端可以确定触发位置指示的图标子区域为目标图标子区域，从而响应编辑指令，显示目标图标(即图标K)对应的应用编辑菜单1313。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 13a, taking the target icon area as the icon area 1311 as an example, assuming that M is 3, then the first icon sub-area may be the top M of all icon sub-areas displaying icons in the target icon area. icon subarea, that is, the first icon subarea may be the icon subarea in which icons J, K, and L are displayed in the target icon area. Assuming that the trigger position of the editing command is the position of the icon sub-region where the icon K is located, and since the first icon sub-region includes the icon sub-region where the icon K is located, it can be understood that the trigger position is the position of the first icon sub-region. location, then the mobile terminal may determine that the icon subarea that triggers the location indication is the target icon subarea, so that in response to the editing instruction, the application editing menu 1313 corresponding to the target icon (ie icon K) is displayed.

可选地，如图13g所示，以目标图标区域为图标区域1342为例，假设M为3，那么第一图标子区域可以为目标图标区域中显示有图标的所有图标子区域中的前M个图标子区域，也就是说，第一图标子区域可以是目标图标区域中显示有图标J、K以及L的图标子区域；第二图标子区域可以是目标图标区域的所有图标子区域中除第一图标子区域以外的图标子区域，也就是说，第二图标子区域可以是显示有图标M的图标子区域。若触发位置为第二图标子区域(即图标M所在的图标子区域所处的位置)或者目标图标区域的所有图标子区域所处的位置以外的位置，那么移动终端可以响应编辑指令，显示目标图标区域(即图标区域1344)对应的区域编辑菜单1345。同理，如果用户对区域编辑菜单1345进行了区域功能选择操作，移动终端可以于区域编辑菜单1345触发区域功能选择指令，从而按照选中的区域编辑功能对目标图标区域(即图标区域1344)进行处理。Optionally, as shown in Figure 13g, taking the target icon area as the icon area 1342 as an example, assuming that M is 3, then the first icon sub-area may be the top M of all icon sub-areas displaying icons in the target icon area. icon sub-areas, that is to say, the first icon sub-area may be the icon sub-area in which icons J, K and L are displayed in the target icon area; the second icon sub-area may be all icon sub-areas in the target icon area except The icon sub-area other than the first icon sub-area, that is, the second icon sub-area may be the icon sub-area where the icon M is displayed. If the trigger position is a position other than the position of the second icon sub-region (that is, the position of the icon sub-region where the icon M is located) or the position of all icon sub-regions of the target icon region, then the mobile terminal may respond to the editing instruction and display the target The area edit menu 1345 corresponding to the icon area (ie, the icon area 1344 ). Similarly, if the user performs an area function selection operation on the area editing menu 1345, the mobile terminal can trigger an area function selection command on the area editing menu 1345, so as to process the target icon area (i.e. icon area 1344) according to the selected area editing function .

通过本申请实施例，移动终端可以确定应用功能选择指令在应用编辑菜单中选中的应用编辑功能，并按照选中的应用编辑功能对目标图标或者目标图标对应的应用进行处理，便于用户快捷地对目标图标区域的目标图标子区域中显示的目标图标或目标图标对应的应用进行处理。若选中的应用编辑功能为卸载功能或移出功能，那么移动终端可以卸载目标图标对应的应用，并删除目标图标，或者移出目标图标，然后确定待显示在目标图标所在的目标图标子区域以及目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中的图标，从而将确定的图标显示在目标图标子区域以及目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中，便于用户快捷地卸载目标图标对应的应用，并删除目标图标，或者快捷地将目标图标从目标图标区域中移出。并且，移动终端可以于目标图标区域的任一图标子区域中显示的图标触发编辑指令，并显示编辑指令所作用的目标图标对应的应用编辑菜单，也可以在目标图标区域中除所有显示有图标的图标子区域以外的位置，于目标图标区域触发编辑指令，并显示目标图标区域对应的区域编辑菜单，便于用户对目标图标区域中的目标图标或者目标图标对应的应用进行处理，也便于用户对目标图标区域进行处理。另外，移动终端可以于目标图标区域的第一图标子区域中显示的图标触发编辑指令，并显示编辑指令所作用的目标图标对应的应用编辑菜单，也可以在第二图标子区域或目标图标区域中除所有图标子区域以外的位置，于目标图标区域触发编辑指令，并显示目标图标区域对应的区域编辑菜单，便于用户对目标图标区域中的目标图标或者目标图标对应的应用进行处理，也便于用户对目标图标区域进行处理。Through the embodiment of the present application, the mobile terminal can determine the application editing function selected by the application function selection command in the application editing menu, and process the target icon or the application corresponding to the target icon according to the selected application editing function, so that the user can quickly and easily edit the target icon. The target icon displayed in the target icon sub-area of the icon area or the application corresponding to the target icon performs processing. If the selected application editing function is an uninstall function or a remove function, then the mobile terminal can uninstall the application corresponding to the target icon, delete the target icon, or remove the target icon, and then determine the target icon sub-area and the target icon to be displayed icon in the icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area, so that the determined icon is displayed in the target icon sub-area and the icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area, so that the user can quickly uninstall the application corresponding to the target icon and delete the target icon, Or quickly move the target icon out of the target icon area. In addition, the mobile terminal can trigger an editing command on an icon displayed in any icon sub-area of the target icon area, and display the application editing menu corresponding to the target icon on which the editing command acts, or it can remove all icons displayed in the target icon area. The editing command is triggered in the target icon area, and the area editing menu corresponding to the target icon area is displayed, which is convenient for the user to process the target icon or the application corresponding to the target icon in the target icon area, and also convenient for the user to edit Target icon area for processing. In addition, the mobile terminal can trigger the editing instruction on the icon displayed in the first icon sub-area of the target icon area, and display the application editing menu corresponding to the target icon on which the editing command acts, or it can also display the icon in the second icon sub-area or the target icon area At positions other than all icon sub-areas in the target icon area, the edit command is triggered in the target icon area, and the area edit menu corresponding to the target icon area is displayed, which is convenient for the user to process the target icon in the target icon area or the application corresponding to the target icon. The user processes the target icon area.

本申请还提供一种智能终端，智能终端包括存储器、处理器，存储器上存储有计算机程序，计算机程序被处理器执行时实现上述任一实施例中的方法的步骤。The present application also provides an intelligent terminal. The intelligent terminal includes a memory and a processor, and a computer program is stored in the memory. When the computer program is executed by the processor, the steps of the method in any of the foregoing embodiments are implemented.

本申请还提供一种计算机存储介质，计算机存储介质上存储有计算机程序，计算机程序被处理器执行时实现上述任一实施例中的方法的步骤。The present application also provides a computer storage medium, on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of the method in any of the foregoing embodiments are implemented.

在本申请提供的智能终端和计算机存储介质的实施例中，可以包含任一上述实施例的全部技术特征，说明书拓展和解释内容与上述方法的各实施例基本相同，在此不做再赘述。The embodiments of the smart terminal and the computer storage medium provided in the present application may include all the technical features of any of the above embodiments, and the expansion and explanation of the description are basically the same as those of the embodiments of the above method, and will not be repeated here.

本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码，当计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如上各种可能的实施方式中的方法。An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes computer program code, and when the computer program code is run on the computer, the computer is made to execute the methods in the above various possible implementation manners.

本申请实施例还提供一种芯片，包括存储器和处理器，存储器用于存储计算机程序，处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，使得安装有芯片的设备执行如上各种可能的实施方式中的方法。The embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, including a memory and a processor. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the device installed with the chip executes the above various possible implementation modes. Methods.

可以理解，上述场景仅是作为示例，并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的应用场景的限定，本申请的技术方案还可应用于其他场景。例如，本领域普通技术人员可知，随着***架构的演变和新业务场景的出现，本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题，同样适用。It can be understood that the above scenario is only an example, and does not constitute a limitation on the application scenario of the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, and the technical solution of the present application can also be applied to other scenarios. For example, those skilled in the art know that with the evolution of the system architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems.

上述本申请实施例序号仅仅为了描述，不代表实施例的优劣。The serial numbers of the above embodiments of the present application are for description only, and do not represent the advantages and disadvantages of the embodiments.

本申请实施例方法中的步骤可以根据实际需要进行顺序调整、合并和删减。The steps in the methods of the embodiments of the present application can be adjusted, combined and deleted according to actual needs.

本申请实施例设备中的单元可以根据实际需要进行合并、划分和删减。Units in the device in the embodiment of the present application may be combined, divided and deleted according to actual needs.

在本申请中，对于相同或相似的术语概念、技术方案和/或应用场景描述，一般只在第一次出现时进行详细描述，后面再重复出现时，为了简洁，一般未再重复阐述，在理解本申请技术方案等内容时，对于在后未详细描述的相同或相似的术语概念、技术方案和/或应用场景描述等，可以参考其之前的相关详细描述。In this application, descriptions of the same or similar terms, concepts, technical solutions and/or application scenarios are generally only described in detail when they appear for the first time, and when they appear repeatedly later, for the sake of brevity, they are generally not repeated. When understanding the technical solutions and other contents of the present application, for the same or similar term concepts, technical solutions and/or application scenario descriptions that are not described in detail later, you can refer to the previous relevant detailed descriptions.

在本申请中，对各个实施例的描述都各有侧重，某个实施例中没有详述或记载的部分，可以参见其它实施例的相关描述。In this application, the description of each embodiment has its own emphasis. For the parts that are not detailed or recorded in a certain embodiment, please refer to the relevant descriptions of other embodiments.

本申请技术方案的各技术特征可以进行任意的组合，为使描述简洁，未对上述实施例中的各个技术特征所有可能的组合都进行描述，然而，只要这些技术特征的组合不存在矛盾，都应当认为是本申请记载的范围。The various technical features of the technical solution of the present application can be combined arbitrarily. For the sake of concise description, all possible combinations of the various technical features in the above-mentioned embodiments are not described. However, as long as there is no contradiction in the combination of these technical features, all It should be regarded as the scope described in this application.

通过以上的实施方式的描述，本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到上述实施例方法可借助软件加必需的通用硬件平台的方式来实现，当然也可以通过硬件，但很多情况下前者是更佳的实施方式。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在如上的一个存储介质(如ROM/RAM、磁碟、光盘)中，包括若干指令用以使得一台终端设备(可以是手机，计算机，服务器，被控终端，或者网络设备等)执行本申请每个实施例的方法。Through the description of the above embodiments, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that the methods of the above embodiments can be implemented by means of software plus a necessary general-purpose hardware platform, and of course also by hardware, but in many cases the former is better implementation. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence or in other words, the part that contributes to the prior art, and the computer software product is stored in one of the above storage media (such as ROM/RAM, magnetic CD, CD), including several instructions to make a terminal device (which may be a mobile phone, computer, server, controlled terminal, or network device, etc.) execute the method of each embodiment of the present application.

在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例的流程或功能。计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络，或者其他可编程装置。计算机指令可以存储在计算机存储介质中，或者从一个计算机存储介质向另一个计算机存储介质传输，例如，计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。计算机存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。可用介质可以是磁性介质，(例如，软盘、存储盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)，或者半导体介质(例如固态存储盘Solid State Disk(SSD))等。In the above embodiments, all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. A computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable apparatus. Computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer storage medium to another, for example, from a website site, computer, server, or data center via wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, Digital Subscriber Line) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center. The computer storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device including a server, a data center, and the like integrated with one or more available media. Usable media may be magnetic media, (eg, floppy disk, memory disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, Solid State Disk (SSD)), among others.

以上仅为本申请的优选实施例，并非因此限制本申请的专利范围，凡是利用本申请说明书及附图内容所作的等效结构或等效流程变换，或直接或间接运用在其他相关的技术领域，均同理包括在本申请的专利保护范围内。The above are only preferred embodiments of the present application, and are not intended to limit the patent scope of the present application. All equivalent structures or equivalent process transformations made by using the description of the application and the accompanying drawings are directly or indirectly used in other related technical fields. , are all included in the patent protection scope of the present application in the same way.

Claims

一种图标区域的管理方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括以下步骤：A method for managing an icon area, characterized in that the method comprises the following steps:

S10：获取第一图标和第二图标；S10: acquiring the first icon and the second icon;

S20：确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，所述第一图标和/或所述第二图标显示在所述区域显示位置；S20: Determine an area display position of the target icon area, where the first icon and/or the second icon are displayed at the area display position;

S30：将显示在所述区域显示位置的图标中除所述第一图标和/或所述第二图标以外的图标移动至非所述区域显示位置的预设图标显示位置；S30: Moving icons displayed at the area display position except for the first icon and/or the second icon to a preset icon display position other than the area display position;

S40：在所述区域显示位置生成所述目标图标区域，并将所述第一图标和所述第二图标显示或移动至所述目标图标区域中。S40: Generate the target icon area at the area display position, and display or move the first icon and the second icon into the target icon area.
根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述确定目标图标区域的区域显示位置，包括：The method according to claim 1, wherein said determining the area display position of the target icon area comprises:

确定所述第一图标的第一图标显示位置；determining a first icon display position of the first icon;

根据所述第一图标显示位置确定所述目标图标区域的区域显示位置。The area display position of the target icon area is determined according to the first icon display position.
根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述第一图标显示位置确定所述目标图标区域的区域显示位置之前，所述方法还包括以下步骤：The method according to claim 2, wherein, before determining the area display position of the target icon area according to the first icon display position, the method further comprises the following steps:

确定所述第二图标的第二图标显示位置；若所述第一图标显示位置以及所述第二图标显示位置不满足预设条件，触发执行所述根据所述第一图标显示位置确定所述目标图标区域的区域显示位置；Determining the second icon display position of the second icon; if the first icon display position and the second icon display position do not meet a preset condition, triggering the execution of the determination of the first icon display position according to the first icon display position The area display position of the target icon area;

若满足预设条件，根据所述第一图标显示位置以及所述第二图标显示位置确定所述目标图标区域的区域显示位置；和/或，If the preset condition is satisfied, the area display position of the target icon area is determined according to the first icon display position and the second icon display position; and/or,

确定所述第二图标的第二图标显示位置；determining a second icon display position of the second icon;

根据所述第一图标显示位置以及所述第二图标显示位置确定所述目标图标区域的区域显示位置。The area display position of the target icon area is determined according to the first icon display position and the second icon display position.
根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述将显示在区域显示位置的图标中除第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标移动至非区域显示位置的预设图标显示位置，包括：The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that, among the icons displayed in the area display position, the icons other than the first icon and/or the second icon are moved to a preset icon display in a non-area display position location, including:

当所述区域显示位置的图标中除所述第一图标和/或所述第二图标以外的图标数量小于或等于当前终端界面中所述预设图标显示位置的数量时，将显示在所述区域显示位置的图标中除所述第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标移动至当前终端界面中非所述区域显示位置的预设图标显示位置；When the number of icons in the area display position other than the first icon and/or the second icon is less than or equal to the number of preset icon display positions in the current terminal interface, it will be displayed in the Among the icons in the area display position, the icons other than the first icon and/or the second icon are moved to a preset icon display position other than the area display position in the current terminal interface;

当所述区域显示位置的图标中除所述第一图标和/或所述第二图标以外的图标数量大于当前终端界面中所述预设图标显示位置数量，将所述区域显示位置的图标中除所述第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标中超过当前终端界面中所述预设图标显示位置数量的部分的图标放置于目标终端界面。When the number of icons in the area display position other than the first icon and/or the second icon is greater than the number of preset icon display positions in the current terminal interface, the icons in the area display position Among the icons other than the first icon and/or the second icon, the icons exceeding the number of preset icon display positions in the current terminal interface are placed on the target terminal interface.
根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述预设图标显示位置的数量为多个；The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the number of preset icon display positions is multiple;

所述将显示在所述区域显示位置的图标中除所述第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标移动至非所述区域显示位置的预设图标显示位置，包括：The moving the icons displayed in the area display position except for the first icon and/or the second icon to a preset icon display position other than the area display position includes:

针对所述显示在所述区域显示位置的图标中除所述第一图标和/或第二图标以外的图标中的至少一个图标，确定与所述至少一个图标的距离最近的预设图标显示位置；For at least one of the icons displayed at the display position of the area except the first icon and/or the second icon, determine a preset icon display position closest to the at least one icon ;

将所述至少一个图标移动至确定的预设图标显示位置。and moving the at least one icon to a determined preset icon display position.
一种界面显示方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括以下步骤：A method for displaying an interface, characterized in that the method comprises the following steps:

获取智能终端的至少一图标；Obtain at least one icon of the smart terminal;

确定所述至少一图标所属的目标图标区域，其中，所述目标图标区域包括至少两个图标子区域；determining a target icon area to which the at least one icon belongs, wherein the target icon area includes at least two icon sub-areas;

将所述至少一图标显示在所述目标图标区域的第一图标子区域，其中，在所述目标图标区域中所述第一图标子区域与第二图标子区域按预设模式显示，所述第二图标子区域为所述目标图标区域中除所述第一图标子区域以外的图标子区域。displaying the at least one icon in a first icon subarea of the target icon area, wherein the first icon subarea and the second icon subarea are displayed in a preset mode in the target icon area, the The second icon sub-area is an icon sub-area in the target icon area except for the first icon sub-area.
根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述获取智能终端的至少一图标，包括：The method according to claim 6, wherein said obtaining at least one icon of the smart terminal comprises:

若所述智能终端的至少一个图标完成安装和/或下载后，则将完成安装和/或下载的图标作为所述至少一图标。If at least one icon of the smart terminal is installed and/or downloaded, the icon that has been installed and/or downloaded is used as the at least one icon.
根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述确定所述至少一图标所属的目标图标区域，包括：The method according to claim 6, wherein the determining the target icon area to which the at least one icon belongs comprises:

在检测到针对所述至少一图标的滑动操作时，确定所述滑动操作所指示的滑动终点位置；When a sliding operation for the at least one icon is detected, determining a sliding end position indicated by the sliding operation;

将所述滑动终点位置所处的图标区域作为所述目标图标区域。The icon area where the sliding end point is located is used as the target icon area.
根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述确定所述至少一图标所属的目标图标区域，包括：The method according to claim 6, wherein the determining the target icon area to which the at least one icon belongs comprises:

获取所述至少一图标对应应用的应用属性信息；Obtain application attribute information of the application corresponding to the at least one icon;

根据所述应用属性信息和图标区域的区域标识的对应关系，确定所述应用属性信息对应的区域标识所标识的图标区域；Determine the icon region identified by the region identifier corresponding to the application attribute information according to the correspondence between the application attribute information and the region identifier of the icon region;

将确定的图标区域作为所述目标图标区域。The determined icon area is used as the target icon area.
根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括以下步骤：The method according to claim 6, further comprising the steps of:

获取所述智能终端的任一图标区域中至少一个历史图标所对应应用的应用参数；Obtain application parameters of the application corresponding to at least one historical icon in any icon area of the smart terminal;

依所述至少一个历史图标所对应应用的应用参数获取第一显示规则，按照第一显示规则对所述至少一个历史图标进行排序。The first display rule is obtained according to the application parameters of the application corresponding to the at least one historical icon, and the at least one historical icon is sorted according to the first display rule.
根据权利要求6至10中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括以下步骤：The method according to any one of claims 6 to 10, further comprising the steps of:

在检测到针对显示在所述智能终端的任一图标区域的任一图标子区域的第一图标的隐藏操作时，对所述第一图标进行隐藏，和/或，对所述图标区域中除所述第一图标以外的图标依第二显示规则进行显示。When a hiding operation for the first icon displayed in any icon sub-area of any icon area of the smart terminal is detected, the first icon is hidden, and/or, all but the icons in the icon area Icons other than the first icon are displayed according to a second display rule.
根据权利要求6至10中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述至少一图标包含至少两图标，所述将所述至少一图标显示在所述目标图标区域的第一图标子区域，包括：The method according to any one of claims 6 to 10, wherein the at least one icon includes at least two icons, and the displaying the at least one icon in the first icon sub-area of the target icon area ,include:

按照所述至少两图标的安装和/或下载时间，将所述至少两图标依第三显示规则显示在所述目标图标区域的第一图标子区域中。According to the installation and/or download time of the at least two icons, the at least two icons are displayed in the first icon sub-area of the target icon area according to a third display rule.
根据权利要求6至10中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述将所述至少一图标显示在所述目标图标区域的第一图标子区域，包括：The method according to any one of claims 6 to 10, wherein the displaying the at least one icon in the first icon sub-area of the target icon area comprises:

若所述目标图标区域包含至少一个锁定图标，则将所述至少一图标显示在所述目标图标区域中除所述锁定图标所在图标子区域以外的第一图标子区域中。If the target icon area includes at least one lock icon, displaying the at least one icon in a first icon sub-area in the target icon area except for the icon sub-area where the lock icon is located.
一种图标的处理方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括以下步骤：A method for processing icons, characterized in that the method comprises the following steps:

获取目标聚类信息；Obtain target clustering information;

根据所述目标聚类信息确定至少一个图标，所述至少一个图标中的聚类信息与所述目标聚类信息相同；determining at least one icon according to the target clustering information, where the clustering information in the at least one icon is the same as the target clustering information;

将所述至少一个图标移动至目标图标区域中。and moving the at least one icon into the target icon area.
根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述获取目标聚类信息，包括：The method according to claim 14, wherein said acquiring target clustering information comprises:

于目标图标触发第一聚类指令；triggering the first clustering instruction on the target icon;

响应所述第一聚类指令，获取所述目标图标的聚类信息，并确定或生成所述目标图标区域；Responding to the first clustering instruction, acquiring clustering information of the target icon, and determining or generating the target icon area;

将所述目标图标的聚类信息作为所述目标聚类信息。The clustering information of the target icons is used as the target clustering information.
根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述获取目标聚类信息，包括：The method according to claim 14, wherein said acquiring target clustering information comprises:

于目标图标和所述目标图标区域触发第二聚类指令；triggering a second clustering instruction on the target icon and the target icon area;

响应所述第二聚类指令，获取所述目标图标的聚类信息；Responding to the second clustering instruction, acquiring clustering information of the target icon;

将所述目标图标的聚类信息作为所述目标聚类信息。The clustering information of the target icons is used as the target clustering information.
根据权利要求15或16所述的方法，其特征在于，所述获取所述目标图标的聚类信息，包括：The method according to claim 15 or 16, wherein the acquiring the clustering information of the target icon comprises:

显示至少一个聚类方式；Show at least one clustering method;

于所述至少一个聚类方式触发聚类方式选择指令；triggering a clustering mode selection instruction on the at least one clustering mode;

按照所述聚类方式选择指令所指示的聚类方式获取所述目标图标的聚类信息。The clustering information of the target icon is acquired according to the clustering mode indicated by the clustering mode selection instruction.
根据权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述至少一个聚类方式包括如下至少一种：属性聚类方式，标签聚类方式，连接设备聚类方式。The method according to claim 17, wherein the at least one clustering mode includes at least one of the following: an attribute clustering mode, a label clustering mode, and a connection device clustering mode.
根据权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述聚类方式选择指令所指示的聚类方式为连接设备聚类方式，与所述目标图标建立过连接的连接设备的数量为多个；所述按照所述聚类方式选择指令所指示的聚类方式获取所述目标图标的聚类信息，包括：The method according to claim 18, wherein the clustering mode indicated by the clustering mode selection instruction is a connected device clustering mode, and the number of connected devices that have established a connection with the target icon is multiple; The acquiring the clustering information of the target icon according to the clustering mode indicated by the clustering mode selection instruction includes:

确定所述目标图标与所述多个连接设备中各个连接设备的亲密度；determining an affinity of the target icon to each of the plurality of connected devices;

将与所述目标图标的亲密度最大的连接设备作为所述目标图标的聚类信息。The connected device with the highest intimacy with the target icon is used as the clustering information of the target icon.
根据权利要求14至16中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述获取目标聚类信息，包括以下至少一种：The method according to any one of claims 14 to 16, wherein said acquiring target clustering information includes at least one of the following:

触发图标区域确定或生成指令，确定或生成所述目标图标区域，将所述目标图标区域的第一区域标识作为所述目标聚类信息；Trigger icon area determination or generation instructions, determine or generate the target icon area, and use the first area identifier of the target icon area as the target clustering information;

触发图标区域确定或生成指令，确定或生成所述目标图标区域，于所述目标图标区域触发第一聚类信息设置指令，根据所述第一聚类信息设置指令，获取所述目标聚类信息；Triggering an icon area determination or generating instruction, determining or generating the target icon area, triggering a first clustering information setting instruction in the target icon area, and obtaining the target clustering information according to the first clustering information setting instruction ;

触发第二聚类信息设置指令，根据所述第二聚类信息设置指令，获取所述目标聚类信息，并确定或生成所述目标图标区域。A second clustering information setting instruction is triggered, and the target clustering information is acquired according to the second clustering information setting instruction, and the target icon area is determined or generated.
根据权利要求20中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述目标聚类信息确定至少一个图标，包括：The method according to any one of claims 20, wherein said determining at least one icon according to said target clustering information comprises:

确定所述目标聚类信息对应的聚类方式；determining a clustering method corresponding to the target clustering information;

按照所述目标聚类信息对应的聚类方式确定图标集中各个图标的聚类信息；Determine the clustering information of each icon in the icon set according to the clustering manner corresponding to the target clustering information;

在所述各个图标中获取聚类信息为所述目标聚类信息的至少一个图标。At least one icon whose clustering information is the target clustering information is obtained from each of the icons.
根据权利要求14至16中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述获取目标聚类信息，包括：The method according to any one of claims 14 to 16, wherein said acquiring target clustering information comprises:

确定所述目标图标区域的第二区域标识；determining a second area identifier of the target icon area;

将所述目标图标区域的第二区域标识作为所述目标聚类信息。The second area identifier of the target icon area is used as the target clustering information.
根据权利要求22所述的方法，其特征在于，所述确定所述目标图标区域的第二区域标识，包括：The method according to claim 22, wherein said determining the second area identifier of the target icon area comprises:

确定所述目标图标区域中的各个图标的聚类信息；determining the clustering information of each icon in the target icon area;

获取同一聚类信息对应的图标的数量；Obtain the number of icons corresponding to the same clustering information;

将数量最大的图标的聚类信息作为所述目标图标区域的第二区域标识。The clustering information of the icon with the largest number is used as the second area identifier of the target icon area.
根据权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，所述确定或生成所述目标图标区域，包括：The method according to claim 20, wherein said determining or generating said target icon area comprises:

确定所述目标图标区域的尺寸；determining the size of the target icon area;

按照所述目标图标区域的尺寸确定或生成所述目标图标区域。The target icon area is determined or generated according to the size of the target icon area.
根据权利要求24所述的方法，其特征在于，所述确定所述目标图标区域的尺寸，包括如下至少一种：The method according to claim 24, wherein the determining the size of the target icon area includes at least one of the following:

确定目标显示界面的预留区域的尺寸，根据所述预留区域的尺寸确定所述目标图标区域的尺寸，所述目标图标区域的尺寸小于或者等于所述预留区域的尺寸；Determine the size of the reserved area of the target display interface, determine the size of the target icon area according to the size of the reserved area, the size of the target icon area is smaller than or equal to the size of the reserved area;

确定所述目标显示界面的预留区域的尺寸，若所述目标图标区域的预设尺寸大于所述预留区域的尺寸，则根据所述预留区域的尺寸确定所述目标图标区域的尺寸，所述目标图标区域的尺寸小于或者等于所述预留区域的尺寸；若所述目标图标区域的预设尺寸小于或者等于所述预留区域的尺寸，则确定所述目标图标区域的尺寸为所述预设尺寸；determining the size of the reserved area of the target display interface, if the preset size of the target icon area is larger than the size of the reserved area, then determining the size of the target icon area according to the size of the reserved area, The size of the target icon area is smaller than or equal to the size of the reserved area; if the preset size of the target icon area is smaller than or equal to the size of the reserved area, it is determined that the size of the target icon area is the the preset size;

于所述目标显示界面触发尺寸设置指令，根据所述尺寸设置指令设置所述目标图标区域的尺寸。A size setting instruction is triggered on the target display interface, and the size of the target icon area is set according to the size setting instruction.
根据权利要求14至16中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述将所述至少一个图标移动至目标图标区域中之后，所述方法还包括以下步骤：The method according to any one of claims 14 to 16, wherein after the at least one icon is moved into the target icon area, the method further comprises the following steps:

于所述目标图标区域中的图标触发图标选择指令，确定选中的图标；An icon in the target icon area triggers an icon selection instruction to determine the selected icon;

于所述选中的图标触发图标位置更新指令，确定所述选中的图标在桌面显示界面中的第一图标显示位置；Triggering an icon position update command on the selected icon to determine the first icon display position of the selected icon in the desktop display interface;

将所述选中的图标由所述目标图标区域移动至所述第一图标显示位置。and moving the selected icon from the target icon area to the first icon display position.
根据权利要求26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述确定所述选中的图标在桌面显示界面中的第一图标显示位置，包括：The method according to claim 26, wherein the determining the first icon display position of the selected icon on the desktop display interface comprises:

确定桌面显示界面中预留图标显示位置；Determine the reserved icon display position in the desktop display interface;

将所述预留图标显示位置中数量为所述选中的图标的数量总和的图标显示位置作为所述选中的图标的第一图标显示位置。Taking an icon display position whose quantity in the reserved icon display positions is the sum of the numbers of the selected icons as the first icon display position of the selected icon.
根据权利要求14至16中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述将所述至少一个图标移动至目标图标区域中之后，所述方法还包括以下步骤：The method according to any one of claims 14 to 16, wherein after the at least one icon is moved into the target icon area, the method further comprises the following steps:

于所述目标图标区域触发位置更新指令，确定所述目标图标区域中的各个图标在桌面显示界面中的第二图标显示位置；Triggering a position update command in the target icon area to determine a second icon display position of each icon in the target icon area on the desktop display interface;

将所述目标图标区域中的各个图标由所述目标图标区域移动至所述第二图标显示位置。Each icon in the target icon area is moved from the target icon area to the second icon display position.
一种图标的处理方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括以下步骤：A method for processing icons, characterized in that the method comprises the following steps:

于目标图标区域的目标图标子区域中显示的目标图标触发编辑指令；The target icon displayed in the target icon sub-area of the target icon area triggers an editing command;

按照选中或所述编辑指令对应的应用编辑功能对所述目标图标或者所述目标图标对应的应用进行处理。The target icon or the application corresponding to the target icon is processed according to the application editing function selected or corresponding to the editing instruction.
根据权利要求29所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括以下步骤：The method according to claim 29, further comprising the steps of:

响应所述编辑指令，显示应用编辑菜单；displaying an application editing menu in response to the editing instruction;

于所述应用编辑菜单触发应用功能选择指令，确定所述应用功能选择指令选中的应用编辑功能。An application function selection instruction is triggered in the application editing menu to determine the application editing function selected by the application function selection instruction.
根据权利要求29所述的方法，其特征在于，所述应用编辑功能包括以下至少一种：卸载功能、从所述目标图标区域中移出图标的移出功能，或更新功能；所述按照所述应用编辑功能对所述目标图标或者所述目标图标对应的应用进行处理，包括：The method according to claim 29, wherein the application editing function includes at least one of the following: an uninstall function, a removal function for removing an icon from the target icon area, or an update function; The editing function processes the target icon or the application corresponding to the target icon, including:

卸载所述目标图标对应的应用，或者将所述目标图标从所述目标图标区域中移出；uninstalling the application corresponding to the target icon, or moving the target icon out of the target icon area;

在所述目标图标区域所包含的图标中确定待显示在所述目标图标子区域以及所述目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中的图标；determining an icon to be displayed in the target icon sub-area and an icon sub-area following the target icon sub-area among the icons included in the target icon sub-area;

将确定的图标显示在所述目标图标子区域以及所述目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中。The determined icon is displayed in the target icon sub-area and the icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area.
根据权利要求31所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在所述目标图标区域所包含的图标中确定待显示在所述目标图标子区域以及所述目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中的图标，包括：The method according to claim 31, characterized in that, among the icons contained in the target icon area, it is determined that the icons to be displayed in the target icon sub-area and the icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area Icons, including:

将显示在所述目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中的图标，以及所述目标图标区域所包含的所有图标中除显示在所述目标图标区域的各个图标子区域的图标以外的任一图标，作为所述确定的图标。Icons to be displayed in the icon sub-area following the target icon sub-area, and any icon in all the icons contained in the target icon area except the icons displayed in each icon sub-area of the target icon area , as the identified icon.
根据权利要求32所述的方法，其特征在于，所述将显示在所述目标图标子区域之后的图标子区域中的图标，以及所述目标图标区域所包含的所有图标中除显示在所述目标图标区域的各个图标子区域的图标以外的任一图标，作为所述确定的图标，包括以下至少一种：The method according to claim 32, wherein the icons to be displayed in the icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area, and all the icons contained in the target icon area except those displayed in the Any icon other than icons in each icon sub-area of the target icon area, as the determined icon, includes at least one of the following:

将所述目标图标子区域之后的第一个图标子区域中显示的图标，确定为待显示在所述目标图标子区域的图标；determining the icon displayed in the first icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area as the icon to be displayed in the target icon sub-area;

将所述目标图标子区域之后的第二个图标子区域中显示的图标，确定为待显示在所述目标图标子区域之后的第一个图标子区域的图标，直至将所述目标图标区域中位于最后一个图标子区域的图标确定为待显示在所述目标图标区域中位于倒数第二个图标子区域的图标；The icon displayed in the second icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area is determined as the icon to be displayed in the first icon sub-area after the target icon sub-area until the icon in the target icon area is The icon located in the last icon sub-area is determined as the icon to be displayed in the penultimate icon sub-area in the target icon area;

从所述目标图标区域所包含的所有图标中除显示在所述目标图标区域的各个图标子区域的图标以外的图标中，确定待显示在所述目标图标区域中位于最后一个图标子区域的图标。Determining the icon to be displayed in the last icon sub-area in the target icon area from among all the icons contained in the target icon area except the icons displayed in each icon sub-area of the target icon area .
根据权利要求30所述的方法，其特征在于，所述响应所述编辑指令，显示应用编辑菜单之后，所述方法还包括以下步骤：The method according to claim 30, wherein after the application editing menu is displayed in response to the editing instruction, the method further comprises the following steps:

于所述应用编辑菜单触发调整指令；Trigger an adjustment command in the application editing menu;

响应所述调整指令，对所述应用编辑菜单的显示位置或显示尺寸进行调整，并显示调整后的应用编辑菜单；Responding to the adjustment instruction, adjusting the display position or display size of the application editing menu, and displaying the adjusted application editing menu;

所述于所述应用编辑菜单触发应用功能选择指令，包括：The triggering of an application function selection instruction in the application editing menu includes:

于所述调整后的应用编辑菜单触发应用功能选择指令。An application function selection instruction is triggered in the adjusted application editing menu.
根据权利要求29所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括以下步骤：The method according to claim 29, further comprising the steps of:

确定所述编辑指令的触发位置；determining the trigger position of the editing instruction;

若所述触发位置为所述目标图标区域中显示有图标的任一图标子区域所处的位置，则确定所述触发位置指示的图标子区域为所述目标图标子区域；和/或，If the trigger position is the position of any icon sub-area in which an icon is displayed in the target icon area, then determine that the icon sub-area indicated by the trigger position is the target icon sub-area; and/or,

若所述触发位置为所述目标图标区域中除显示有图标的所有图标子区域所处的位置以外的位置，则响应所述编辑指令，按照所述编辑指令对应的区域编辑功能对所述目标图标区域进行处理。If the trigger position is a position other than the position of all icon sub-regions displaying icons in the target icon area, then in response to the editing instruction, the target is edited according to the area editing function corresponding to the editing instruction. The icon area is processed.
根据权利要求29所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标图标区域包括第一图标子区域和第二图标子区域，所述第一图标子区域为所述目标图标区域中显示有图标的所有图标子区域中的前M个图标子区域，所述第二图标子区域为所述目标图标区域的所有图标子区域中除所述第一图标子区域以外的图标子区域；所述方法还包括以下步骤：The method according to claim 29, wherein the target icon area includes a first icon sub-area and a second icon sub-area, and the first icon sub-area is all icons displayed in the target icon area For the first M icon sub-areas in the icon sub-area, the second icon sub-area is an icon sub-area in all icon sub-areas of the target icon area except the first icon sub-area; the method further includes The following steps:

确定所述编辑指令的触发位置；determining the trigger position of the editing instruction;

若所述触发位置为所述第一图标子区域所处位置，则确定所述触发位置指示的图标子区域为所述目标图标子区域；和/或，If the trigger position is where the first icon sub-region is located, then determine that the icon sub-region indicated by the trigger position is the target icon sub-region; and/or,

若所述触发位置为所述第二图标子区域所处位置或所述目标图标区域的所有图标子区域所处的位置以外的位置，则响应所述编辑指令，按照所述编辑指令对应的区域编辑功能对所述目标图标区域进行处理。If the trigger position is a position other than the position of the second icon sub-region or the position of all icon sub-regions of the target icon region, then in response to the edit instruction, according to the region corresponding to the edit instruction The editing function processes the target icon area.
一种智能终端，其特征在于，所述智能终端包括：存储器、处理器，其中，所述存储器上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被所述处理器执行时实现如权利要求1或6或14或29中任一项方法的步骤。An intelligent terminal, characterized in that the intelligent terminal comprises: a memory and a processor, wherein a computer program is stored on the memory, and when the computer program is executed by the processor, the computer program according to claim 1 or 6 or The steps of any one of 14 or 29 methods.
一种计算机存储介质，其特征在于，所述存储介质上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如权利要求1或6或14或29中任一项方法的步骤。A computer storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored on the storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of any one of the methods in claim 1 or 6 or 14 or 29 are realized.